Formulations

ABSTRACT

The present invention relates to a formulation comprising a pharmaceutically active ingredient and a coating. The invention also relates to the use of the formulation in the treatment and prevention of disorders of the gastrointestinal tract. Also disclosed are methods for preparing the formulations.

This is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/034,847, filedMay 5, 2016, which is a U.S. National Stage of International ApplicationNo. PCT/EP2014/074057 filed Nov. 7, 2014, which was published in Englishunder PCT Article 21(2), which in turn claims the benefit of GreatBritain Application No. 1319791.8, filed Nov. 8, 2013. Theseapplications are incorporated herein in their entireties.

This invention relates to a formulation comprising a pharmaceuticallyactive ingredient and a coating. The invention also relates to the useof the formulation in the treatment and prevention of disorders of thegastrointestinal tract. Also disclosed are methods for preparing theformulations.

BACKGROUND

Formulating pharmaceutically active ingredients into a form suitable foradministration to a patient is a developed area of science. It is also akey consideration for the efficacy of a drug. There are many examples ofmethods for formulating drugs and other active ingredients. The aim ofthese formulations are varied and can range from increasing systemicabsorption, allowing for a new route of administration, improvingbioavailability, reducing metabolism of the active, or avoidingundesirable routes of administration.

WO 2008/122965 discloses oral cyclosporin minicapsule compositions withmodified release properties which release cyclosporin in at least thecolon. WO2010/133609 discloses compositions comprising a water-solublepolymer matrix in which are dispersed droplets of oil, the compositionscomprising a modified release coating. The disclosed compositions alsocontain an active principle.

BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE DISCLOSURE

It has surprisingly been found that pharmaceutical formulations whichhave a coating which is or comprises a water-soluble cellulose etherhave a higher total release of active from the formulation and/or agreater rate of release of the active compared to a formulation whichdoes not have the coating. This coat constitutes the first coating. Thefirst coating may also be referred to as a subcoat. The greater extentand/or rate of release of the active provides a formulation which has anovel in-vitro release profile (and consequently a novel in-vivopharmacokinetic profile) compared to the same formulations without thecoating. In vitro dissolution testing has also shown that formulationsaccording to the invention reduce batch to batch variability in thein-vitro release profile. Accordingly, the formulations are expected todemonstrate a reduced inter and/or intra-patient variability compared toformulations lacking the coating.

The formulation may comprise a second coating to control or modulaterelease of the active ingredient, for example cyclosporin A, mesalazineand hydralazine, from the formulation. Advantageously the coating is apolymeric coating to provide delayed and/or sustained release of theactive ingredient, for example cyclosporin A, mesalazine or hydralazine,from the formulation. Suitable such coatings are described in moredetail below and include a coating which is or comprises a coatingselected from a controlled release polymer, a sustained release polymer,an enteric polymer, a pH independent polymer, a pH dependent polymer anda polymer specifically susceptible to degradation by bacterial enzymesin the gastrointestinal tract, or a combination of two or more suchpolymers. In a particular embodiment the second coating is or comprisesa pH-independent polymer, for example a coating which is or comprisesethyl cellulose. In a further specific embodiment the second coating isor comprises a pH-independent polymer, for example ethyl cellulose, anda water-soluble polysaccharide, for example pectin or chitosan, or acombination thereof, particularly pectin. The respective polymers of thefirst coating and the second coating are different. Often the secondcoating does not have any polymer found in the first coating; forexample, if the first coating comprises (e.g. is) a hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, then the second coating will not also comprise ahydroxypropylmethyl cellulose. In addition the situation is contemplatedwhere the first coating is or comprises a water-soluble ether or esterof a cellulose ether, the major component(s) (e.g. more than 50%) of thesecond coating is or comprises a different polymer to that of the firstcoating. Accordingly, the first and second coatings suitably provide twolayers of material as part of the composition. It is to be understoodthat when the second coating comprises a mixture of components, minorcomponents of the outer second coating may be the same as the materialof the sub-coating. By way of example, when the first coating is orcomprises HPMC and the second coating comprises ethyl cellulose, theethyl cellulose may optionally further comprise a minor amount (e.g.less than 50%, 40%, 30% or 20%) of the first coating material, HPMC inthis example. In such embodiments the first coating and the secondcoating are considered to be different.

According to an embodiment of the invention, the active ingredientoptionally is or comprises cyclosporin A, hydralazine or mesalazine,said coating which is or comprises a water-soluble cellulose ether is afirst coating and the formulation further comprises a second coatingoutside the first coating; and wherein the second coating is orcomprises a coating, suitably a polymeric coating, to control ormodulate release of the active ingredient from the formulation. Thepolymeric coating may be as further described elsewhere in thisspecification.

In the invention the first coating suitably is or comprises awater-soluble cellulose ether. The water-soluble cellulose ether may beany cellulose ether or derivative of a cellulose ether, for example anester of a cellulose ether, that is soluble in water. Therefore, thewater-soluble cellulose ether may be selected from: an alkyl cellulose;a hydroxyalkyl cellulose; a hydroxyalkyl alkyl cellulose; and acarboxyalkyl cellulose. Suitably the first coating is or comprises oneor more water-soluble cellulose ethers selected from: methyl cellulose,hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, and combinations thereof. In particular embodiments the firstcoating is or comprises a water-soluble hydroxypropyl methylcellulose.The water-soluble cellulose ethers and water-soluble derivatives thereof(e.g. water-soluble esters of a cellulose ether) present in the firstcoating (sub-coat) suitably form at least 20%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%,85% or 90% by weight of the dry weight of the first coating.

The formulation of the invention may comprise a core, a first coatingoutside the core, wherein the first coating is a water-soluble celluloseether as described above and elsewhere herein; and a second coatingoutside the first coating; wherein the core comprises a hydrogel-formingpolymer matrix and a pharmaceutically active ingredient, optionally ahydrophobic or hydrophilic active ingredient, for example cyclosporin A,hydralazine or mesalazine.

In accordance with the present invention there is provided apharmaceutical formulation comprising a core and a coating, wherein thecore comprises a hydrogel forming polymer matrix and a pharmaceuticallyactive ingredient and the coating comprises or is a water solublecellulose ether and the coating is present in an amount corresponding toa weight gain due to the coating of from 0.5% to 20% by weight of thecore.

The coating of the present invention modifies the release of the activeingredient from the formulation. There would be an expectation that acoating on a formulation would slow the rate of release of the activeingredient within a formulation. One might reasonably expect this ascoating the formulation with additional material would provide anadditional barrier to a dissolution medium coming into contact with theactive ingredient in the formulation. In contrast to this expectedoutcome, the present invention surprisingly provides a formulation witha coating comprising or being a water soluble cellulose ether thatincreases the rate of release of the active ingredient compared to aformulation without the coating. In addition the coating of the presentinvention has the beneficial effect of maintaining the active ingredientin solution, whereas a comparable formulation lacking the coating of theinvention provides less of the active ingredient in solution as timeprogresses. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed thatthe coating prevents precipitation of the active ingredient fromsolution, thereby maintaining a higher amount of the active in solution.

Throughout the present application active ingredient, active, andpharmaceutically active ingredient are used interchangeably and allrefer to the same subject matter.

The formulation of the present invention may take any form known to theperson skilled in the art. Preferably, the formulation is an oralformulation. The formulation may be in the form of a single minibead ora multiplicity of minibeads.

The formulation may comprise a coating present in an amountcorresponding to a weight gain due to the coating selected from rangesof from: 0.5% to 15%; 1% to 15%; 1% to 12%; 1% to 10%; 1% to 8%; 1% to6%; 1% to 4%, 2% to 10%; 2% to 8%; 2% to 6%; 2% to 7%; 2% to 4%; 4% to8%; 4% to 7%, 4% to 6%, 5% to 7%; 7% to 20%; 7% to 16%; 9% to 20%; 9% to16%; 10% to 15%; and 12% to 16%.

The formulation of the invention may comprise a coating with a thicknessof 1 μm to 1 mm. Thus, the % weight gain due to the coating specifiedabove may correspond to a thickness of 1 μm to 1 mm.

The invention also provides for a pharmaceutical formulation comprisinga core and a coating, wherein the core comprises a hydrogel formingpolymer matrix and a pharmaceutically active ingredient, wherein thecoating comprises or is a water-soluble cellulose ether and the coatinghas a thickness of from 1 μm to 1 mm.

The coating may have a thickness selected from ranges of from: 1 μm to500 μm; 10 μm to 250 μm; 10 μm to 100 μm; 10 μm to 50 μm; 10 μm to 20μm; 50 μm to 100 μm; 100 μm to 250 μm; 100 μm to 500 μm; 50 μm to 500μm; 50 μm to 250 μm; 100 μm to 1 mm; 500 μm to 1 mm. The coating havingthe thicknesses disclosed in this paragraph may be any of the coatingsin the application. In particular the coating referred to in thisparagraph may be the water-soluble cellulose ether coating.

Any of the pharmaceutical formulations of the invention may comprise afurther, or second, coating. The second coating may be outside the firstcoating. The second coating may be or comprise a delayed releasepolymer. Where the formulations of the invention comprise a secondcoating the coating referred to above may be referred to as the firstcoating. Any disclosure given below in relation to a second coating isalso applicable to the second coating referred to in this paragraph. Inany embodiment and any aspect of the invention the first and secondcoating may be different.

The invention therefore, contemplates a pharmaceutical formulationcomprising a core, a first coating and a second coating outside of thefirst coating, wherein the core comprises a pharmaceutically activeingredient, the first coating comprises or is a water soluble celluloseether, and the second coating comprises or is a delayed release polymer,wherein the first coating is present in an amount corresponding to aweight gain due to the coating of from 0.5% to 20% by weight of thecore. The core may optionally further comprise a hydrogel formingpolymer.

In addition, the invention provides for a pharmaceutical formulationcomprising a core, a first coating and a second coating outside of thefirst coating, wherein the core comprises a pharmaceutically activeingredient, the first coating comprises or is a water soluble celluloseether, and the second coating comprises or is a delayed release polymer,and the first coating has a thickness of from 1 μm to 1 mm. The core mayoptionally further comprise a hydrogel forming polymer.

Included in the invention is a pharmaceutical formulation comprising acore and a coating, wherein the core comprises a pharmaceutically activeingredient and the coating comprises or is a water-soluble celluloseether. The coating is present in an amount to provide a higher % insolution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient from the formulationthan a formulation without the coating at 0.5 hours from the start of adissolution test to measure the % in solution of the pharmaceuticallyactive ingredient in a dissolution medium consisting of water, thedissolution test being carried out in accordance with USP <711>Dissolution using Apparatus II (paddle apparatus) operated with a paddlespeed of 75 rpm and with the dissolution medium at a temperature of 37°C.±0.5° C. Alternatively, the higher % in solution of the activeingredient from the formulation may be at 20 mins, 40 mins 1 hour or 1.5hours from the start of a dissolution test instead of at 0.5 hours.Additionally, the higher % in solution of the active ingredient from theformulation may be at time points selected from: 20 mins and 40 mins;0.5 hours and 1 hour; 1 hour and 1.5 hours; or 0.5 hours, 1 hour and 1.5hours. The % in solution of the active ingredient from the formulationmay be higher for a period selected from one of those spanning from: 0hours to 0.5 hours; 0 hours to 1 hour; 0 hours to 1.5 hours; or 0.5hours to 1.5 hours. Preferably, the % in solution of thepharmaceutically active ingredient from the formulation of the inventionis higher than a formulation without the coating for the period up to1.5 hours from the start of the dissolution test.

In embodiments the higher % in solution of the pharmaceutically activeingredient is at 0.5 hours and a time point selected from: 20 mins, 40mins, 1 hour 1.5 hours, and any combination thereof. In embodiments thehigher % in solution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient may befor the period up to 1.5 hours from the start of the dissolution test.

The % in solution of the active of a formulation of the invention withthe coating may be higher than a formulation without the coating at aspecific time point by: 10 or more, 15 or more, 20 or more, 30 or more,40 or more, or 45 or more at 0.5 hours; 10 or more, 15 or more, or 20 ormore at 1 hour; and/or 3 or more, 5 or more, 8 or more, or 10 or more at1.5 hours. The higher % in solution values described herein may beattained when a single time point is specified, more than one time pointis specified or where a period has been specified.

For example, a formulation of the invention with the coating may give a% in solution that is 10 or more higher at 0.5 hours and 10 or morehigher at 1 hour and 5 or more higher at 1.5 hours.

It is contemplated within this aspect of the invention that the coatingmay further be present in an amount corresponding to a % weight gain byweight of the core of: from 1% to 15%, from 1% to 12%, from 2% to 15%,from 2% to 12%, from 1% to 9%, from 2% to 8%, from 2% to 3%, from 2% to5%, from 5% to 7%, from 4% to 6.5%, from 6% to 7%, or from 2% to 7%.Preferably, the coating may be present in an amount corresponding to aweight gain of from 1% to 9%, from 2% to 8%, from 4% to 6.5%, from 2% to5% or from 2% to 7%, optionally from 4% to 6.5%, from 2% to 5% or from2% to 7%. The % weight gain of the coating relative to the core may becombined with any of the specified higher % in solution values and anytime point.

For example, the coating may be present in an amount to provide a higher% in solution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient at 0.5 hours,wherein the % in solution of the active may be higher by 30, optionally35 and the coating may be present in an amount corresponding to a %weight gain by weight of the core of from 2% to 7%, optionally from 2%to 4%. Alternatively, the coating may be present in an amount to providea higher % in solution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient at 0.5hours, wherein the % in solution of the active may be higher by 40,optionally 45 and the coating may be present in an amount correspondingto a % weight gain by weight of the core of from 4% to 7%, optionallyfrom 5% to 7%.

The invention also contemplates a formulation comprising a core and acoating, wherein the core comprises a pharmaceutically active ingredientand the coating comprises or is a water-soluble cellulose ether. Thecoating is present in an amount to provide a % in solution of more than60% of the pharmaceutically active ingredient at 1 hour from the startof a dissolution test to measure the % in solution of thepharmaceutically active ingredient in a dissolution medium consisting ofwater, the dissolution test being carried out in accordance with USP<711> Dissolution using Apparatus II (paddle apparatus) operated with apaddle speed of 75 rpm and with the dissolution medium at a temperatureof 37° C.±0.5° C. Alternatively, the % in solution of the activeingredient may be more than 65%, 70%, 75%. The % in solution may also beselected from a range from: 60% to 90%, 65% to 85%, 68% to 83%, 68% to73%, 72% to 78%, 75% to 85%, or 77% to 83%, 68% to 78% preferably 68% to83%.

In combination with or as an alternative to any of the amounts of % insolution disclosed in the preceding paragraph the coating may be presentin an amount to additionally or alternatively provide a % in solutionof: more than 35%, 38%, 48%, 50%, 60%, 65%, 70% or 75% at 0.5 hours fromthe start of the dissolution test; and/or more than 75% at 1.5 hours.

It is contemplated within this aspect of the invention that the coatingmay further be present in an amount corresponding to a % weight gain byweight of the core of: from 1% to 15%, from 1% to 12%, from 2% to 15%,from 2% to 12%, from 1% to 9%, from 2% to 8%, from 2% to 3%, from 2% to5%, from 5% to 7%, from 4% to 6.5%, from 6% to 7%, or from 2% to 7%.Preferably, the coating may be present in an amount corresponding to aweight gain of from 1% to 9%, from 2% to 8%, from 4% to 6.5%, from 2% to5% or from 2% to 7%, optionally from 4% to 6.5%, from 2% to 5% or from2% to 7%. The % weight gain of the coating relative to the core may becombined with any of the specified % in solution values and any timepoint.

For example, the coating may be present in an amount to provide a % insolution of more than 70%, optionally more than 75% or from 70% to 90%or from 75% to 85%, of the pharmaceutically active ingredient at 1 hour,and the coating may be present in an amount corresponding to a % weightgain by weight of the core of from 2% to 7%, optionally from 2% to 4% or5% to 6%. Alternatively, the coating may be present in an amount toprovide a % in solution of more than 65%, optionally more than 68% orfrom 65% to 90% or from 68% to 78%, of the pharmaceutically activeingredient at 1 hour, and the coating may be present in an amountcorresponding to a % weight gain by weight of the core of from 9% to20%, optionally from 9% to 16% or 10% to 15%.

Also contemplated by the invention is a pharmaceutical formulationcomprising a core and a coating, wherein the core comprises apharmaceutically active ingredient, optionally a hydrophobic activeingredient, and the coating comprises or is a water-soluble celluloseether. The coating is present in an amount to provide a % in solution ofthe pharmaceutically active ingredient of more than 75%, optionally 80%,at 12 hours from the start of a dissolution test in a dissolution mediumconsisting of water, the dissolution test being carried out inaccordance with USP <711> Dissolution using Apparatus II (paddleapparatus) operated with a paddle speed of 75 rpm and with thedissolution medium at a temperature of 37° C.±0.5° C. In an alternativeor in addition to the coating being present in an amount to provide a %in solution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient of more than 75%at 12 hours, the coating may be present in an amount to provide a % insolution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient of: more than 70%,(for example more than 75% or 80%) at 14 hours; more than 60% (forexample more than 65%, 70% or 75%) at 16 hours; more than 50% (forexample more than 55%, 60%, 65%, or 70%) at 18 hours; more than 40% (forexample more than 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65% or 70%) at 20 hours; more than40% (for example more than 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65% or 70%) at 22 hours;or 35% (for example more than 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, or 65%) at 24hours. In an embodiment the coating is present in an amount to provide a% in solution specified in this paragraph at one or more of the timepoints specified in this paragraph.

For example, in an embodiment the % in solution is more than 75% at 12hours and more than 35%, optionally more than 50%, at 24 hours.Alternatively, the % in solution is more than 80% at 12 hours and morethan 50% at 24 hours. The % in solution may be more than 75% at 12 hoursand more than 70% at 14 hours. The % in solution may be more than 75% at12 hours and more than 60% at 16 hours. The % in solution may be morethan 75% at 12 hours and more than 50% at 18 hours. The % in solutionmay be more than 75% at 12 hours and more than 40% at 20 hours. The % insolution may be more than 75% at 12 hours and more than 40% at 22 hours.The % in solution may be more than 75% at 12 hours, more than 60% at 16hours and more than 35% at 24 hours. The % in solution may be more than75% at 12 hours, more than 70% at 14 hours, more than 60% at 16 hours,more than 50% at 18 hours, more than 40% at 20 hours, more than 40% at22 hours, and more than 35% at 24 hours.

It is contemplated within this aspect of the invention that the coatingmay further be present in an amount corresponding to a % weight gain byweight of the core of: from 7% to 20%, from 8% to 20%, from 9% to 20%,from 8% to 17%, from 8% to 16%, from 9% to 16%, from 10% to 15%, from12% to 17%, from 8% to 12%, or from 9% to 12%. Preferably, the coatingmay be present in an amount corresponding to a weight gain of from 9% to16%, from 10% to 15%, from 12% to 17%, from 8% to 12%, or from 9% to12%, optionally from 9% to 16%, or from 10% to 15%. The % weight gain ofthe coating relative to the core may be combined with any of thespecified % in solution values and any time point.

For example, the coating may be present in an amount to provide a % insolution of more than 70%, optionally more than 75% or 80%, of thepharmaceutically active ingredient at 12 hours, and the coating may bepresent in an amount corresponding to a % weight gain by weight of thecore of from 9% to 16%, from 10% to 15%, from 12% to 17%, from 8% to12%, or from 9% to 12%, optionally from 9% to 16%, or from 10% to 15%.Alternatively, the coating may be present in an amount to provide a % insolution of more than 70%, optionally more than 75% or 80%, of thepharmaceutically active ingredient at 12 hours and more than 50%,optionally more than 50%, 55%, 65%, 70% or 75%, at 16 hours, and thecoating may be present in an amount corresponding to a % weight gain byweight of the core of from 9% to 16%, from 10% to 15%, from 12% to 17%,from 8% to 12%, or from 9% to 12%, optionally from 9% to 16%, or from10% to 15%. Further similar combinations of features are contemplated bythe invention.

Also contemplated by the invention is a pharmaceutical formulationcomprising a core and a coating, wherein the core comprises apharmaceutically active ingredient, optionally a hydrophobic activeingredient, and the coating comprises or is a water-soluble celluloseether. The coating is present in an amount to provide a higher % insolution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient from the formulationthan a corresponding formulation without the coating at 12 hours fromthe start of a dissolution test in a dissolution medium consisting ofwater, the dissolution test being carried out in accordance with USP<711> Dissolution using Apparatus II (paddle apparatus) operated with apaddle speed of 75 rpm and with the dissolution medium at a temperatureof 37° C.±0.5° C. In an alternative or in addition to the coating beingpresent in an amount to provide a higher % in solution of thepharmaceutically active ingredient at 12 hours, the higher % in solutionof the active ingredient from the formulation may be at 10, 11, 13, 14,15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 hours or any combination of oneor more thereof, from the start of a dissolution test.

A hydrophobic active ingredient is any active that is substantiallyinsoluble in water. The active may have some solubility in water.Therefore, a hydrophobic active ingredient is one which is more readilysoluble in a non-aqueous phase as opposed to water. In addition ahydrophobic active ingredient may be an active that falls within ClassII or Class IV of the Biopharmaceutics Classification System, theseclasses containing highly permeable, low solubility drugs and lowpermeability, low solubility drugs respectively. Solubilities ofcomponents of the invention, e.g. active entities, functionalcomponents, etc., in a solvent (for example water) may be defined asfollows, the solubility being measured at 25° C. and parts being byweight:

Descriptive Team Parts of Solvent for 1 part of solute Very Soluble Lessthan 1 Freely Soluble From 1 to 10 Soluble From 10 to 30 SparinglySoluble From 30 to 100 Slightly Soluble From 100 to 1000 Very SlightlySoluble From 1000 to 10,000 Practically Insoluble More than 10,000

In embodiments the coating is present in an amount to provide a higher %in solution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient from theformulation than for a corresponding formulation without the coating attime points selected from the following combinations: 12 hours and 10hours; 12 hours and 14 hours; 12 hours and 14 hours and 16 hours; 12hours, 14 hours, 16 hours and 18 hours; and 12 hours, 14 hours, 16hours, 18 hours and 20 hours.

In embodiments the coating is present in an amount to provide a higher %in solution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient from theformulation than for a corresponding formulation without the coating fora period selected from one of those spanning from: 8 hours to 16 hours,10 to 16 hours; 10 to 18 hours; 10 to 24 hours; 12 to 18 hours; 12 to 22hours; 12 to 24 hours; 4 to 24 hours; and 0 to 24 hours, preferably 12to 24 hours.

In addition, the % in solution for a formulation with the coating may behigher than for a corresponding formulation without the coating at aspecific time point by more than: 5 or 10 at 12 hours; 5, 10, or 15 at14 hours; 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25 at 16 hours; 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, or 30 at18 hours; 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 35 at 20 hours; 5, 10, 15, 20, 25,30, or 35 at 22 hours; and/or 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, or 40 at 24hours. The higher values of % in solution described herein may beattained when a single time point is specified, more than one time pointis specified or where a period is specified.

For example, the % in solution for a formulation with the coating may behigher than for a corresponding formulation without the coating by morethan: 5 (optionally 10) at 12 hours; or 5 (optionally 10) at 12 hoursand 10 (optionally 15) at 14 hours; or 5 (optionally 10) at 12 hours, 10(optionally 15) at 14 hours, and 15 (optionally 20) at 16 hours; or 5(optionally 10) at 12 hours, 10 (optionally 15) at 14 hours, 15(optionally 20) at 16 hours, and 20 (optionally 25) at 18 hours; or 5(optionally 10) at 12 hours, 10 (optionally 15) at 14 hours, 15(optionally 20) at 16 hours, 20 (optionally 25) at 18 hours, and 25(optionally 30) at 20 hours; or 5 (optionally 10) at 12 hours, 10(optionally 15) at 14 hours, 15 (optionally 20) at 16 hours, 20(optionally 25) at 18 hours, 25 (optionally 30) at 20 hours, and 20(optionally 25) at 22 hours; or 5 (optionally 10) at 12 hours, 10(optionally 15) at 14 hours, 15 (optionally 20) at 16 hours, 20(optionally 25) at 18 hours, 25 (optionally 30) at 20 hours, 20(optionally 25) at 22 hours, and 20 (optionally 30) at 24 hours. By wayof illustration, the % in solution achieved by a formulation of theinvention may be 50% at 12 hours and the % in solution achieved by acorresponding formulation without the coating may be 40% at 12 hours: inthis case the % in solution for the formulation with the coating ishigher than that for the formulation without the coating by 10.

It is contemplated within this aspect of the invention that the coatingmay further be present in an amount corresponding to a % weight gain byweight of the core of: from 5% to 20%, from 7% to 20%, from 8% to 20%,from 9% to 20%, from 8% to 17%, from 8% to 16%, from 5% to 16%, from 9%to 16%, from 10% to 15%, from 12% to 17%, from 8% to 12%, or from 9% to12%. Preferably, the coating may be present in an amount correspondingto a weight gain of from 9% to 16%, from 10% to 15%, from 12% to 17%,from 8% to 12%, or from 9% to 12%, optionally from 9% to 16%, or from10% to 15%. The % weight gain of the coating relative to the core may becombined with any of the specified % in solution values and any timepoint.

For example, the coating may be present in an amount to provide a higher% in solution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient at 12 hours(i.e. a higher % in solution than that achieved by a correspondingformulation without the coating), wherein the % in solution of theactive may be higher by 5, optionally 10, and the coating may be presentin an amount corresponding to a % weight gain by weight of the core offrom 9% to 16%, from 10% to 15%, from 12% to 17%, from 8% to 12%, orfrom 9% to 12%, optionally from 9% to 16%, or from 10% to 15%.Alternatively, the coating may be present in an amount to provide ahigher % in solution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient at 12hours, wherein the % in solution of the active may be higher by 5,optionally 10, and by 5, optionally 10, 15, 20, or 25, at 16 hours andthe coating may be present in an amount corresponding to a % weight gainby weight of the core of from 9% to 16%, from 10% to 15%, from 12% to17%, from 8% to 12%, or from 9% to 12%, optionally from 9% to 16%, orfrom 10% to 15%.

The invention contemplates a pharmaceutical formulation comprising acore and a coating, wherein the core comprises a pharmaceutically activeingredient and the coating comprises or is a water-soluble celluloseether. The coating is present in an amount to provide a decrease(compared to a corresponding formulation without the coating) in % insolution of the pharmaceutically active ingredient of 15 or less in aperiod from 10 hours to 16 hours from the start of a dissolution test ina dissolution medium consisting of water, the dissolution test beingcarried out in accordance with USP <711> Dissolution using Apparatus II(paddle apparatus) operated with a paddle speed of 75 rpm and with thedissolution medium at a temperature of 37° C.±0.5° C.

Alternatively, the period may be selected from a period from: 8 hours to16 hours; 6 hours to 16 hours; 4 hours to 16 hours; 8 hours to 14 hours;6 hours to 14 hours; 4 hours to 14 hours; 8 hours to 18 hours, 6 hoursto 18 hours, or 4 hours to 16 hours. The decrease in % in solution maybe 10 or less, 8 or less, 5 or less, or 3 or less. The decrease in % insolution may be any amount selected from 15 or less, 10 or less, or 5 orless at any time point specified.

For example, the decrease in % in solution may be 10 or less for theperiod of 8 to 16 hours. The decrease in % in solution may be 15 or lessfor the period of 4 to 18 hours. The decrease in % in solution may be 10or less for the period of 4 to 18 hours. The decrease in % in solutionmay be 8 or less for the period of 4 to 18 hours. The decrease in % insolution may be 10 or less for the period of 4 to 16 hours. The decreasein % in solution may be 8 or less for the period of 4 to 16 hours. Thedecrease in % in solution may be 3 or less for the period of 6 to 12hours. The decrease in % in solution may be 15 or less for the period of6 to 16 hours. The decrease in % in solution may be 10 or less for theperiod of 6 to 16 hours. The decrease in % in solution may be 5 or lessfor the period of 6 to 16 hours.

It is contemplated within this aspect of the invention that the coatingmay further be present in an amount corresponding to a % weight gain byweight of the core of: from 5% to 20%, from 7% to 20%, from 8% to 20%,from 9% to 20%, from 8% to 17%, from 8% to 16%, from 9% to 16%, from 5%to 16%, from 10% to 15%, from 12% to 17%, from 8% to 12%, or from 9% to12%. Preferably, the coating may be present in an amount correspondingto a weight gain of from 9% to 16%, from 10% to 15%, from 12% to 17%,from 8% to 12%, or from 9% to 12%, optionally from 9% to 16%, or from10% to 15%. The % weight gain of the coating relative to the core may becombined with any of the specified % in solution values and any timepoint.

Throughout the disclosure of this application any change in the % insolution, for example where the % in solution is said to be higher by acertain value or the % in solution has decreased by a certain value, thevalue of the change has been given as a digit. This digit signifies theabsolute amount that the % in solution has changed by; for example wherethe % in solution of the active of a formulation of the invention withthe coating is said to be higher than a formulation without the coatingby more than 10 means that where the % in solution of the formulationwithout the coating is 50% the % in solution of the formulation of theinvention will be more than 60%.

Also contemplated by the invention is a pharmaceutical formulationcomprising a core, a first coating and a second coating outside thefirst coating, wherein the core comprises a pharmaceutically activeingredient, the first coating comprises or is a water-soluble celluloseether, further wherein the second coating comprises or is a delayedrelease polymer, wherein the first coating is present in an amount toprovide a higher % release of the pharmaceutically active ingredientfrom the pharmaceutical formulation than a corresponding pharmaceuticalformulation without the first coating at 12 hours from the start of adissolution test.

Unless specified otherwise the dissolution medium used in thedissolution test of any aspect of the invention may be a dissolutionmedium representative of the in-vivo medium in which the formulation isto be used. Specifically, aspects of the invention where there is afirst coating and a second coating. In such embodiments the dissolutiontest may be any dissolution test known to the person skilled in the artto represent the gastrointestinal tract. Preferably the dissolution testis carried out in accordance with USP <711> Dissolution using ApparatusII (paddle apparatus) operated with a paddle speed of 75 rpm and withthe relevant dissolution medium at a temperature of 37° C.

In embodiments of the invention the dissolution test may be a two stagedissolution test and the two stage dissolution test may consist of afirst stage having a dissolution medium of 750 ml 0.1N HCl into whichthe formulation is placed and a second stage commencing at 2 hours,wherein 250 ml 0.2M tribasic sodium phosphate containing 2% sodiumdodecyl sulphate (SDS) is added to the dissolution medium and the pHadjusted to 6.8. This dissolution test may be particularly suitable formeasuring release of hydrophobic actives, for example cyclosporin, fromthe formulation.

In other embodiments the dissolution test may consist of a dissolutionmedium consisting of 1000 ml of a 0.05M pH 7.5 phosphate buffer preparedby dissolving monobasic potassium phosphate and sodium hydroxide inwater. This dissolution test may be particularly suitable for measuringrelease of hydrophilic actives, for example hydralazine and mesalamine,from the formulation. In particular the dissolution test may be thedissolution test described below: 0.05M pH 7.5 phosphate buffer preparedby dissolving 6.8 g of monobasic potassium phosphate and 1 g of sodiumhydroxide in water to make 1000 mL of solution, and adjusting with 10Nsodium hydroxide to a pH of 7.5±0.05; 900 mL are used in a USP Apparatus2 with a paddle speed of 75 RPM and with the dissolution mediumtemperature at 37° C.±0.5° C.

In particular the two stage dissolution test was carried out inaccordance with USP <711> Dissolution using Apparatus II (paddleapparatus) operated with a paddle speed of 75 rpm and with thedissolution medium at a temperature of 3⁷° C.±0.5° C. In the first stageof the test the dissolution medium is 750 ml of 0.1N HCl simulating thegastric environment. At the start of the test (t=0) the sample is placedin the dissolution medium. At 2 hours the second stage of thedissolution test is initiated. In the second stage 250 ml of 0.2Mtribasic sodium phosphate containing 2% sodium dodecyl sulphate (SDS) isadded to the dissolution medium and the pH adjusted to 6.8±0.05 using 2NNaOH or 2N HCl as required.

In any of the formulations comprising a first coating and secondcoating, the first coating may be present in an amount to provide ahigher % release of the pharmaceutically active ingredient at any pointin time after 3 hours from the start of the dissolution test. Forexample, the higher % release may be at 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6hours, 7 hours, 8 hours, 9 hours, 10 hours, 11 hours, 12 hours, 13hours, 14 hours, 15 hours, 16 hours, 17 hours, 18 hours, 19 hours, 20hours, 21 hours, 22 hours, 23 hours or 24 hours. The higher % releasemay be at one or more of the time points, preferably one or moreconsecutive time points.

For example, the higher % release may be at: 3 hours and 4 hours; 3hours, 4 hours and 5 hours; 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 11 hours, 12hours, and 13 hours; 11 hours 12 hours, and 13 hours; or 11 hours, 12hours, 13 hours, 14 hours, 20 hours, 21 hours, 22 hours and 24 hours.

The higher % release may be for a period selected from one or acombination of periods of from: 11 to 12 hours, 11 to 13 hours, 12 to 13hours, 11 to 14 hours, 10 to 14 hours, 18 to 22 hours, 20 to 24 hours, 4to 8 hours, 3 to 8 hours, 3 to 12 hours, 3 to 6 hours, 8 to 14 hours, 8to 18 hours, 8 to 22 hours, 6 to 22 hours, 8 to 24 hours, 4 to 14 hours,4 to 18 hours 4 to 22 hours, 4 to 24 hours, 3 to 20 hours, 3 to 22 hoursor 3 to 24 hours.

The higher % release may be at 16 hours, 17 hours, and 18 hours; or at14 hours, 15 hours, 16 hours, 17 hours and 18 hours. The higher %release may be for the period of 18 to 22 hours or 20 to 24 hours.Optionally, the dissolution medium is deionised water.

In addition, the % in solution for a formulation with the coating may behigher than for a corresponding formulation without the coating at aspecific time point by more than: 5, 10, 15, 20 or 25 at 12 hours; 5,10, 15, or 20 at 14 hours; 5, 10, 15, or 20 at 16 hours; 5, 10, 15, or20 at 18 hours; 5, 10 or 15 at 20 hours; 5 or 10 at 22 hours; 5 or 10 at24 hours; 5, 10, 15, 20 or 25 at 10 hours; 5, 10, 15, or 20 at 8 hours;5, 10, 15, or 20 at 6 hours; 5 or 10 at 4 hours. The higher values of %in solution described herein may be attained when a single time point isspecified, more than one time point is specified or where a period isspecified.

For example, the % in solution for a formulation with the coating may behigher than for a corresponding formulation without the coating by morethan: 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours; or 5 (optionally 10,15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours and 5 (optionally 10, 15 or 20) at 14 hours;or 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 10 hours and 5 (optionally 10, 15,20 or 25) at 12 hours; or 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 8 hours 5(optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 10 hours and 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20or 25) at 12 hours; or 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 6 hours, 5(optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 8 hours or 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25)at 10 hours and 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours; or 5(optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20)at 14 hours, and 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 16 hours; or 5(optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 10 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or25) at 12 hours, and 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 14 hours; or 5(optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 10 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or25) at 12 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 14 hours and 5(optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 16 hours; or 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or25) at 12 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 14 hours, 5 (optionally10, 15, or 20) at 16 hours, and 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 18hours; or 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 10 hours, 5 (optionally 10,15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 14 hours, 5(optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 16 hours, and 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20)at 18 hours; or 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 8 hours or 5 (optionally10, 15, 20 or 25) at 10 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 12hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 14 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15,or 20) at 16 hours, and 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 18 hours; or 5(optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 6 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 8hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 10 hours, 5 (optionally 10,15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 14 hours, 5(optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 16 hours, and 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20)at 18 hours; or 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours, 5(optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 14 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at16 hours, and 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 18 hours, and 5(optionally 10 or 15) at 20 hours; or 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at10 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours, 5 (optionally 10,15, or 20) at 14 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 16 hours, and 5(optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 18 hours, and 5 (optionally 10 or 15) at20 hours; or 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 8 hours, 5 (optionally 10,15, 20 or 25) at 10 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours,5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 14 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20)at 16 hours, and 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 18 hours, and 5(optionally 10 or 15) at 20 hours; or 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 6hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 8 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20or 25) at 10 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours, 5(optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 14 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at16 hours, and 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 18 hours, and 5(optionally 10 or 15) at 20 hours; or 5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at12 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 14 hours, 5 (optionally 10,15, or 20) at 16 hours, and 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 18 hours, 5(optionally 10 or 15) at 20 hours, and 5 (optionally 10) at 22 hours; or5 (optionally 10, 15, 20 or 25) at 12 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or20) at 14 hours, 5 (optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 16 hours, and 5(optionally 10, 15, or 20) at 18 hours, 5 (optionally 10 or 15) at 20hours, 5 (optionally 10) at 22 hours, and 5 (optionally 10) at 24 hours;or 5 (optionally 10) at 12 hours, 10 (optionally 15) at 14 hours, 15(optionally 20) at 16 hours, 20 (optionally 25) at 18 hours, 25(optionally 30) at 20 hours, and 20 (optionally 25) at 22 hours; or 5(optionally 10) at 12 hours, 10 (optionally 15) at 14 hours, 15(optionally 20) at 16 hours, 20 (optionally 25) at 18 hours, 25(optionally 30) at 20 hours, 20 (optionally 25) at 22 hours, and 20(optionally 30) at 24 hours.

The invention also contemplates a pharmaceutical formulation comprisinga core, a first coating and a second coating outside of the firstcoating, wherein the core comprises a pharmaceutically activeingredient, the first coating comprises or is a water-soluble celluloseether, further wherein the second coating comprises or is a delayedrelease polymer, wherein the first coating is present in an amount toprovide a % release of the pharmaceutically active ingredient of morethan 50%, optionally more than 55% and 60% (for example more than 65%,70%, 75%, 80%, 85% or 90%) at 12 hours from the start of a dissolutiontest, wherein the dissolution test is described above.

The first coating may be present in an amount to provide a % release ofthe pharmaceutically active ingredient at 12 hours of from: 70% to 95%,75% to 95%, 70% to 90%, 75% to 90%, 70% to 85%, 70% to 80%, or 75% to85%, preferably 75% to 95%, 80% to 95% or from 85% to 95%.

The first coating may be present in an amount to provide a % release ofthe pharmaceutically active ingredient at 12 hours of from 55% to 80%.

The first coating may further be present in an amount to provide a %release of the pharmaceutically active ingredient in an amount of morethan 40%, (optionally more than 45% or more than 50%) at 6 hours or 4hours from the start of the dissolution test. The % release of thepharmaceutically active ingredient may be in an amount of from 40% to65% (optionally 45% to 65%) at 6 hours or 4 hours from the start of thedissolution test. Optionally, the first coating may be present in aweight gain of from 1% to 20% and the second coating may be present in aweight gain of from 4% to 25%, optionally from 4% to 15%, from 4% to12%, from 15% to 25% from 4% to 6% or 8% to 13%. Where the % release is20% or more (optionally 45% or more) at 4 hours the second coating ispreferably present in a weight gain of at least 4%, preferably no morethan 25% and optionally 4% to 6%. Where the % release is 40% or more(optionally 45% or more) at 6 hours the second coating is preferablypresent in a weight gain of at least 4%, preferably no more than 25% andoptionally 8% to 13%.

The first coating may further or alternatively be present in an amountto provide a % release of the pharmaceutically active ingredient in anamount of more than 15% (for example more than 20%, 25%, 28% or 30%),optionally from 25% to 40% or from 25% to 35%, at 4 hours from the startof the dissolution test. Optionally, the first coating may be present ina weight gain of from 1% to 20% and the second coating may be present ina weight gain of from 4% to 15%, optionally from 4% to 6% or 8% to 13%.

The first coating may be present in an amount to provide a % release ofthe pharmaceutically active ingredient in an amount of more than 25%,optionally from 25% to 40% or 25% to 35%, at 6 hours. Optionally, thefirst coating may be present in a weight gain of from 1% to 20% and thesecond coating may be present in a weight gain of from 4% to 15%,optionally from 4% to 6% or 8% to 13%. Where the % release of the activeingredient is more than 25%, optionally from 25% to 40% or 25% to 35%,at 6 hours the active ingredient may be a hydrophilic active ingredient,for example mesalamine, optionally suspended in the disperse phase. Thedisperse phase is described in more detail below.

In embodiments the % release at 12 hours may be more than 80%, whereinthe first coating may be present in a weight gain of from 1% to 20% andthe second coating may be present in a weight gain of from 4% to 15%,optionally from 4% to 6% or 8% to 13%.

In embodiments the active ingredient is a hydrophobic active, forexample cyclosporin A. In embodiments the active ingredient is ahydrophobic active, for example cyclosporin A and the % release is morethan 70% (optionally 75% or 80%) at 12 hours. Optionally, the firstcoating may be present in an amount corresponding to a weight gain dueto the coating of from 0.5% to 20% by weight of the core (optionallyfrom 1% to 16%, from 4% to 16%, from 4% to 12%, or from 3% to 6%) and/orthe second coating is present in an amount corresponding to a weightgain due to the second coating of from 2% to 20% by weight. (optionally4% to 20%, 4% to 15%, 8% to 18%, or 8% to 12%).

The first coating may be present in an amount to provide a % release ofthe pharmaceutically active ingredient at 12 hours of from 55% to 80%, a% release of the pharmaceutically active ingredient at 6 hours of from25% to 40%, and a % release of the pharmaceutically active ingredient at4 hours of more than 15%.

In any aspect of the invention and any embodiment the core may comprisea hydrogel forming polymer matrix. The hydrogel forming polymer matrixmay be as described below.

The core of a pharmaceutical formulation of any aspect or embodiment ofthe invention may be in the form of a solid colloid. The colloidcomprises a continuous phase and a disperse phase. Suitable continuousphases and disperse phases which may be used to form the core aredefined in more detail below and in the detailed description of theinvention. The continuous phase may comprise or be the hydrogel formingpolymer matrix. Hence, where the continuous phase is the hydrogelforming polymer matrix, the formulation of the invention may take theform of a solid unit of the hydrogel forming polymer comprising adisperse phase. The disperse phase may be droplets dispersed in thecontinuous phase, or the hydrogel forming polymer matrix. The dispersephase may comprise or be a hydrophobic phase.

The continuous phase of a solid colloid core is or comprises ahydrogel-forming polymer matrix. In embodiments the hydrogel-formingpolymer matrix is or comprises a hydrocolloid, a non-hydrocolloid gum orchitosan. In a particular embodiment the hydrogel-forming polymer matrixis or comprises gelatin, agar, a polyethylene glycol, starch, casein,chitosan, soya bean protein, safflower protein, alginates, gellan gum,carrageenan, xanthan gum, phthalated gelatin, succinated gelatin,cellulosephthalate-acetate, oleoresin, polyvinylacetate, polymerisatesof acrylic or methacrylic esters and polyvinylacetate-phthalate and anyderivative of any of the foregoing; or a mixture of two or more suchpolymers. In a further embodiment the hydrogel-forming polymer matrix isor comprises a hydrocolloid selected from carrageenan, gelatin, agar andpectin, or a combination thereof optionally selected from gelatin andagar or a combination thereof. Particularly, the polymer of thehydrogel-forming polymer matrix is or comprises gelatin. In anembodiment, the hydrogel-forming polymer does not comprise a celluloseor a cellulose derivative, e.g. does not comprise a cellulose ether.

In this aspect of the invention the core may be in the form of a solidcolloid the colloid comprising a continuous phase and a disperse phaseand the pharmaceutically active ingredient may be in solution orsuspended in the disperse phase. For example, the active ingredient maybe a hydrophobic active ingredient in solution in the disperse phase ora hydrophilic active ingredient suspended in the disperse phase.

In embodiments of this aspect of the invention the active ingredient maybe a hydrophobic active ingredient, for example cyclosporin, and theactive ingredient may be in solution in the disperse phase. The firstcoating may be present in a weight gain of from 0.5% to 20% and thesecond coating may be present in a weight gain of from 8% to 12% and thefirst coating is present in an amount to provide a % release of 80% ormore. Optionally, the water-soluble cellulose ether may be hydroxylpropyl methyl cellulose.

In a further aspect the invention contemplates a pharmaceuticalformulation comprising a core, a first coating and a second coatingoutside of the first coating, wherein the core comprises apharmaceutically active ingredient, the first coating comprises or is awater-soluble cellulose ether, further wherein the second coatingcomprises or is a delayed release polymer, wherein the first coating ispresent in an amount to provide a % release of the pharmaceuticallyactive ingredient of more than 70%, (for example more than 75% or 80%)at 6 hours from the start of a dissolution test, wherein the dissolutiontest is as described above.

In embodiments the first coating is present in an amount to provide a %release of from 75% to 95% or from 80% to 90% of the pharmaceuticallyactive ingredient at 6 hours.

The second coating may be present in an amount to provide a weight gainof 2% to 20%, 5% to 15%, 8% to 12%, 2% to 8%, 3% to 7%, or 4% to 6%.

The active ingredient may be a hydrophobic active ingredient, forexample cyclosporin A. The active ingredient may be in solution in thedisperse phase.

The invention also contemplates a pharmaceutical formulation comprisinga core, a first coating and a second coating outside of the firstcoating, wherein the core comprises a pharmaceutically activeingredient, optionally a hydrophilic active ingredient, the firstcoating comprises or is a water-soluble cellulose ether, further whereinthe second coating comprises or is a delayed release polymer, whereinthe first coating is present in an amount to provide a % release of thepharmaceutically active ingredient of more than 30% (for example morethan 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55% or 60%) at 12 hours from the start of adissolution test, wherein the dissolution test is as described above.

The first coating may be present in an amount to allow release of from30% to 80%, optionally 30% to 70%, 35% to 70%, 40% to 70%, 40% to 50% or60% to 70% of the active ingredient at 12 hours.

The first coating may be present in a weight gain selected from a rangeof from: 1% to 20%, 4% to 7%, 5% to 7%, 4% to 15%, 4% to 12% and 8% to12%. The second coating may be present in a weight gain selected from arange of from: 8% to 12%.

The active ingredient may be in solution in the continuous phase of theformulation, where the formulation is in the form of a solid colloidcomprising a continuous phase and a disperse phase. The activeingredient may be a hydrophilic active ingredient, for examplemesalazine or hydralazine, which is in solution in the continuous phase.In embodiments the active ingredient is a hydrophilic active in solutionin the continuous phase, the first coating is present in an amount toprovide a % release of 35% to 50% and a weight gain of 4% to 7%, and thesecond coating is present in a weight gain of 8% to 12%. In alternativeembodiments the active ingredient is a hydrophilic active in solution inthe continuous phase, the first coating is present in an amount toprovide a % release of 55% to 75% and a weight gain of 8% to 12%, andthe second coating is present in a weight gain of 8% to 12%.

It is to be understood that the individual embodiments described abovemay be combined with one or more of the other embodiments described toprovide further embodiments of the invention defined by for example acombination of one or more of the embodiments to the time points, timeperiods, % in solution, % released, values of the increase of higher %in solution, values of the increase of higher % released.

The first coating may be in contact with the core. The second coatingmay be on the first coating. In embodiments the first coating is incontact with the core and the second coating is on the first coating.

The second coating may be or may comprise a delayed release polymer andthe delayed release polymer may be selected from an enteric polymer, apH independent polymer, a pH dependent polymer and a polymerspecifically susceptible to degradation by bacterial enzymes in thegastrointestinal tract, or a combination of two or more such polymers.Hence, the second coating may be any of the aforementioned delayedrelease polymers or any may be or possess the characteristics mentionedin relation to the delayed release polymer mentioned below.

In embodiments the delayed release polymer may be water-soluble orwater-permeable in an aqueous medium with a pH greater than 6.5. Thedelayed release polymer may be or comprise a pH-independent polymer, forexample ethyl cellulose.

In any aspect and any embodiment of the invention the water-solublecellulose ether may be selected from any one or a combination of: methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose andhydroxypropyl methylcellulose. The water-soluble cellulose ether maypreferably be hydroxylpropyl methylcellulose.

In embodiments the first coating may be or comprise hydroxypropyl methylcellulose and the second coating may be or comprise ethyl cellulose.

It is contemplated within any aspect or embodiment where there is afirst coating and a second coating that the first coating may be presentin a % weight gain relative to the core of from 0.5% to 20%. In additionthe first coating may be present in an amount corresponding to a weightgain due to the coating selected from ranges of from: 0.5% to 15%; 1% to15%; 1% to 12%; 1% to 10%; 1% to 8%; 1% to 6%; 1% to 4%, 2% to 10%; 2%to 8%; 2% to 6%; 2% to 7%; 2% to 4%; 4% to 8%; 4% to 7%, 4% to 6%, 5% to7%; 7% to 20%; 7% to 16%; 9% to 20%; 9% to 16%; 10% to 15%; and 12% to16%.

It is contemplated within any aspect or embodiment where there is afirst coating and a second coating that the second coating may bepresent in a % weight gain of from 2% to 40%. In addition the secondcoating may be present in an amount corresponding to a weight gain dueto the coating selected from ranges of from: 4% to 30%, 4% to 7%, 7% to40%, 7% to 30%, 8% to 25%, 8% to 20%, 2% to 25%, 2% to 20%, 4% to 25%,4% to 20%, 4% to 15%, 4% to 13%, 7% to 15%, 7% to 13%, 8% to 12%, 9% to12% and 20% to 25%.

Throughout the disclosure of this application the weight gain of thefirst coating is given as a % by weight of the core and the weight gainof the second coating is given as a % by weight of the formulation thatis coated by the second coating, for example the core and the firstcoating.

In any aspect and embodiment of the invention the first coating may bepresent in a % weight gain relative to the core of from 0.5% to 20%,preferably 1% to 16% or 4% to 16%, and the second coating may be presentin a % weight gain of 4% to 24%, 7% to 24%, 22% to 24%, 7% to 15%, or 8%to 12%, preferably 22% to 24%, 7% to 15%, or 8% to 12%.

The hydrogel forming polymer may be or comprise a hydrocolloid, anon-hydrocolloid gum or chitosan. The hydrogel forming polymer may be areversible hydrocolloid, for example a thermoreversible hydrocolloid ora thermoreversible hydrogel forming polymer. Alternatively, the hydrogelforming polymer may be or comprise an irreversible hydrocolloid. Thehydrogel forming polymer matrix may be or comprise gelatin, agar, apolyethylene glycol, starch, casein, chitosan, soya bean protein,safflower protein, alginates, gellan gum, carrageenan, xanthan gum,phthalated gelatin, succinated gelatin, cellulosephthalate-acetate,oleoresin, polyvinylacetate, polymerisates of acrylic or methacrylicesters and polyvinylacetate-phthalate and any derivative of any of theforegoing; or a mixture of one or more such a hydrogel forming polymers.The hydrogel forming polymer matrix may be or comprise a hydrocolloidselected from carrageenan, gelatin, agar and pectin, or a combinationthereof optionally selected from gelatin and agar or a combinationthereof, more optionally the polymer of the a hydrogel forming polymermatrix is or comprises gelatin. The hydrogel forming polymer matrix isor comprises a non-hydrocolloid gum optionally selected from across-linked salt of alginic acid. In preferred embodiments the hydrogelforming polymer is or comprises gelatin.

In embodiments the hydrogel forming polymer further comprising aplasticiser, optionally a plasticiser selected from glycerin, a polyolfor example sorbitol, polyethylene glycol and triethyl citrate or amixture thereof, particularly sorbitol.

The hydrogel forming polymer matrix may encapsulate the activeingredient. The active ingredient may be encapsulated as a suspension inthe hydrogel forming polymer matrix or in solution. The activeingredient may be in solution or suspended in another component, forexample a hydrophobic phase or the disperse phase discussed elsewhere,of the formulation that is also encapsulated by the hydrogel formingpolymer matrix.

The core of the pharmaceutical formulation of the invention may be inthe form of a solid colloid the colloid comprising a continuous phaseand a disperse phase, wherein the continuous phase optionally comprisesthe hydrogel forming polymer matrix. Hence the pharmaceuticalformulation of all aspects of the invention may comprise at least thefollowing features a core and a first coating, wherein the corecomprises an active ingredient and is in the form of a solid colloidcomprising a continuous phase and a disperse phase, and the coatingcomprises or is a water soluble cellulose ether. The continuous phasemay be formed of the hydrogel forming polymer matrix.

In embodiments the active ingredient is or is comprised in the dispersephase of the core. In embodiments, the active ingredient is comprised inthe continuous phase of the core. In embodiments, a first activeingredient is or is comprised in the disperse phase of the core and asecond active ingredient is comprised in the continuous phase of thecore.

The disperse phase may be solid, semi-solid or liquid. In particular,the disperse phase may be liquid. In other particular instances thedisperse phase may be semi-solid, for example it may be waxy.

The disperse phase may be a hydrophobic phase, for example a hydrophobicphase which is a solid, a semi-solid or a liquid. Suitably the dispersephase is or comprises a liquid lipid and optionally a solvent miscibletherewith.

The active ingredient may be dissolved in the disperse phase. The activeingredient may be suspended in the disperse phase. The disperse phasemay be as described elsewhere herein, for example it may be as describedin the immediately preceding two paragraphs.

In a particular embodiment the disperse phase is or comprises a liquidlipid and a solvent, wherein the solvent is miscible with the liquidlipid and water, optionally wherein the solvent is selected from2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol and a poly(ethylene glycol), particularlywherein the solvent is 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol. In a furtherembodiment the disperse phase is or comprises an oil phase comprising amedium chain mono- di- or triglyceride (particularly a medium chaintriglyceride), a polyethoxylated castor oil and 2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol.The disperse phase as described in this paragraph may contain ahydrophobic active ingredient, for example, cyclosporin A, or ahydrophobic active ingredient, for example mesalazine.

In embodiments the formulation further comprises one or moresurfactants, suitable surfactants are described in more detail in thedetailed description of the invention. In those embodiments where theformulation comprises a core in the form of a solid colloid, the colloidcomprising a continuous phase and a disperse phase, wherein thecontinuous phase comprises the hydrogel-forming polymer matrix,surfactant may be present in the continuous phase, the disperse phase orboth the continuous phase and the disperse phase. Accordingly in oneembodiment the core further comprises a surfactant present in at leastthe continuous phase, the surfactant having an HLB value of greater than10, for example greater than 20. In a further embodiment the dispersephase further comprises a surfactant with an HLB value in the range offrom 1 to 10, for example from 1 to 5.

The core may have the characteristics of a core formed by mixing adisperse phase with a continuous phase to form a colloid, wherein thecontinuous phase is an aqueous phase comprising hydrogel forming polymerand the disperse phase is a hydrophobic phase, wherein thepharmaceutically active ingredient is in the continuous phase or thedisperse phase, wherein the colloid is gelled to form the core.

The active ingredient may be a hydrophobic active ingredient or ahydrophilic active ingredient. The active ingredient may be present inthe core in solution or in suspension and this is true for when thedisperse phase or the continuous phase comprises the active ingredient.In embodiments where the active ingredient is a hydrophobic activeingredient it may be in solution in the disperse phase, for examplewhere the disperse phase is or comprises a hydrophobic phase, a liquidlipid, an oil, a polyunsaturated fatty acid or a solvent, or suspendedin the continuous phase. In embodiments where the active ingredient is ahydrophilic active ingredient it may be suspended in the disperse phase,for example where the disperse phase is or comprises a hydrophobicphase, a liquid lipid, an oil, a polyunsaturated fatty acid or asolvent, or in solution in the continuous phase.

The core of the formulation may comprise a hydrogel-forming polymermatrix and a pharmaceutically active ingredient and have thecharacteristics of a core obtained by a process comprising:

(i) dissolving a hydrogel-forming polymer in an aqueous liquid to forman aqueous solution;(ii) dissolving or dispersing the active ingredient in a liquid to forma solution or dispersion (particularly a solution) of the activeingredient in the liquid (an oil phase);(iii) mixing the aqueous solution (i) and the solution or dispersion(ii) to form a colloid;(iv) ejecting the colloid through a nozzle to form droplets;(v) causing or allowing the a hydrogel-forming polymer to gel orsolidify to form a hydrogel-forming polymer matrix; and(vi) drying the solid.

The solution or dispersion (ii) (oil phase) may be prepared bydissolving or dispersing the cyclosporin A in a suitable hydrophobicliquid. The hydrophobic liquid may be for example, any of the oils orliquid lipids described herein. By way of example the hydrophobic liquidmay be, or comprise, saturated or unsaturated fatty acids or atriglyceride, or an ester or ether thereof with polyethylene glycols. Aparticular oil for the oil phase is or comprises a triglyceride, forexample an oil comprising a medium chain triglyceride, optionallywherein the oil comprises a triglyceride of at least one fatty acidselected from fatty acids having 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12 carbon atoms,e.g. C₈-C₁₀ fatty acids.

In a variant, the core of the formulation may comprise ahydrogel-forming polymer matrix and a pharmaceutically active ingredientand have the characteristics of a core obtained by a process comprising:

(i) dissolving in an aqueous liquid a hydrogel-forming polymer and theactive ingredient to form an aqueous solution;(ii) mixing the aqueous solution (i) and a second liquid (an oil phase)to form a colloid;(iii) ejecting the colloid through a nozzle to form droplets;(iv) causing or allowing the a hydrogel-forming polymer to gel orsolidify to form a hydrogel-forming polymer matrix; and(v) drying the solid.

The active ingredient used in all methods described in thisspecification may be one described herein, for example it may behydrophilic or it may be hydrophobic. It may be selected from thehydrophilic active ingredients described herein. It may be selected fromthe hydrophobic active ingredients described herein.

Suitably the aqueous phase pre-mix (i) further comprises an anionicsurfactant, e.g. as described elsewhere herein, for example sodiumdodecyl sulphate (SDS).

In one embodiment the core having the characteristics of a core obtainedby the process above is a core comprising a hydrogel-forming polymermatrix and a non-aqueous phase dispersed in the hydrogel-forming polymermatrix, wherein the core is or comprises gelatin, SDS, sorbitol,polyethoxylated castor oil, caprylic/capric triglyceride,2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol; wherein the aqueous solution (i) is orcomprises gelatin, sorbitol and SDS; and the solution or dispersion (ii)is or comprises polyethoxylated castor oil, caprylic/caprictriglyceride, 2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol and the active ingredient.

The core of the formulation may alternatively comprise ahydrogel-forming polymer matrix and a pharmaceutically active ingredientand have the characteristics of a core obtained by a process comprising:

(a) dissolving a hydrogel-forming polymer in an aqueous liquid to forman aqueous solution;(b) before, during or after dissolving the hydrogel-forming polymer inthe aqueous liquid, mixing the active ingredient in the aqueous liquid;(c) then ejecting the aqueous liquid comprising the hydrogel-formingpolymer and the active ingredient through a nozzle to form droplets;(d) causing or allowing the a hydrogel-forming polymer to gel orsolidify to form a hydrogel-forming polymer matrix; and(e) drying the solid.

In the method of the immediately preceding paragraph, the activeingredient may be dissolved in the aqueous liquid or, for example, itmay be dispersed in the aqueous liquid in particulate form.

Cores having the characteristics of cores obtained by theabove-described processes, for example cores obtained by the processes,are coated to provide a coating that comprises or is a water-solublecellulose ether, optionally with a second coating to control or modifyrelease, preferably a polymeric coating as described above and herein.The coated formulation may be obtained by applying to the core thecoating, e.g. applying to the core first and second coatings asdescribed. Before the coating is applied, the core may be made by aprocess having steps (i) to (vi), (i) to (v) or (a) to (e) describedabove. Suitable methods for applying the coating(s) are described belowand include applying the coatings by spray coating a coating formulationonto the core. The processes having steps (i) to (vi), (i) to (v) or (a)to (e) themselves form aspects of the invention.

It has been found that the use of certain surfactants during themanufacture of the compositions are particularly effective instabilising the colloid (for example emulsion), resulting from themixing of the aqueous solution (i) and oil phase (ii) comprising thehydrophobic active ingredient, e.g. cyclosporin A. When the colloidcomprises an oil-in-water emulsion, it has been found that the presenceof a surfactant having an HLB of up to 10 (particularly up to 8) in theoil phase is particularly effective in stabilising the emulsion duringthe preparation of the composition. The presence of such surfactants hasbeen found to inhibit the formation of crystals of the hydrophobicactive ingredient, e.g. cyclosporin A, after the formation of thecolloid (oil-in-water emulsion). The presence of a surfactant with anHLB of up to 10 maintains the hydrophobic active ingredient, e.g.cyclosporin A, in solution in the oil phase during manufacture and mayalso provide favourable release of the hydrophobic active ingredient,e.g. cyclosporin A, in a solubilised form from the composition followingoral administration of the composition to a subject. Compositionscomprising a surfactant with an HLB of up to 10 in at least the oilphase may exhibit high rates of release and/or extent of release of thehydrophobic active ingredient, e.g. cyclosporin A, from the compositioncompared to the use of surfactants with a higher HLB value in the oilphase. The presence of a surfactant with an HLB of up to 10 in at leastthe oil phase in the composition may inhibit the precipitation of thehydrophobic active ingredient, e.g. cyclosporin A, after release of thehydrophobic active ingredient, e.g. cyclosporin A, from the compositionthereby retaining higher levels of the hydrophobic active ingredient ina solubilised form within the GI tract, for example in the colon. Thecompositions described herein wherein the composition comprises an oilphase and a surfactant having an HLB of up to 10 form a furtherindependent aspect of the invention.

Accordingly provided is a pharmaceutical formulation comprising a coreand a coating, wherein the core comprises a pharmaceutically activeingredient and is in the form of a solid colloid comprising a continuousphase and a disperse phase, wherein the continuous phases comprises ahydrogel forming polymer matrix and the disperse phase comprises asurfactant with an HLB value in the range of from 1 to 10, for examplefrom 1 to 5, and the coating comprises or is a water soluble celluloseether and the coating is present in an amount corresponding to a weightgain due to the coating of from 0.5% to 20% by weight of the core.

Similarly there is provided a pharmaceutical formulation comprising acore and a coating, wherein the core comprises a pharmaceutically activeingredient and is in the form of a solid colloid comprising a continuousphase and a disperse phase, wherein the continuous phases comprises ahydrogel forming polymer matrix and the disperse phase comprises asurfactant with an HLB value in the range of from 1 to 10, for examplefrom 1 to 5, and the coating comprises or is a water-soluble celluloseether and the coating has a thickness of from 1 μm to 1 mm.

The disperse phase may comprise an oil phase. In an embodiment the oilphase comprises an oil and a surfactant (suitably a non-ionicsurfactant) wherein the oil and the surfactant both have an HLB in therange 0-10. Accordingly, a core of the present invention may comprise apharmaceutically active ingredient and may be in the form of a solidcolloid comprising a continuous phase and a disperse phase, wherein thecontinuous phases comprises a hydrogel forming polymer matrix and thedisperse phase comprises an oil phase comprising an oil and a surfactant(suitably a non-ionic surfactant) wherein the oil and the surfactantboth have an HLB in the range 0-10. For example the oil has an HLB of1-5, for example 1 to 4 or 1-2 and the surfactant has an HLB 2-8, forexample 3-7, 2-6, or 3-4).

The surfactant present in the oil phase may be any of the surfactantsdescribed herein with an HLB value up to 10 The surfactant present inthe oil phase may a HLB value selected from: up to 8, up to 7, 1-8, 1-7,1-5, 2-5, 1-4, 1-3, 1-2, 2-4, 3-4, 5-8, 6-8 and 6-7. Suitably thesurfactant present in the oil phase is a non-ionic surfactant having anHLB value above.

The oil may be any of the oils described herein. Suitably the oil is notitself a surfactant. However, certain oils, particularly those derivedfrom natural sources will comprise components which may have surfaceactive properties. For example many triglyceride oils also comprise monoand diglyceride components and may therefore exhibit some surfactantlike properties. Accordingly the oil suitably has an HLB value of 0-10,however suitably the oil has an HLB which is close to 0 for example anHLB of 0 to 3, optionally about 0, about 1 or about 2.

The oil and the surfactant present in the oil phase may bothindependently have an HLB value of 0 to 10. The oil may have an HLB of1-5 and the surfactant may have an HLB of 2-8, optionally 3-7, 2-6, or3-4. Suitably the oil and the surfactant are different.

The active ingredient may be a hydrophobic active ingredient, e.g.cyclosporin A, and may be soluble in the oil. The hydrophobic activeingredient, e.g. cyclosporin A, may be soluble in the surfactant used inthe oil phase. Suitably the hydrophobic active ingredient, e.g.cyclosporin A, is soluble in both the oil and the surfactant. Suitably,substantially all of the cyclosporin A may be dissolved in the oilphase.

The oil phase may further comprises a solvent, wherein the solvent ismiscible with the disperse phase and water, optionally wherein thesolvent is selected from 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol and a poly(ethyleneglycol), particularly wherein the solvent is 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol.

The hydrogel forming polymer of the core may be any of the hydrogelforming polymers described herein.

The composition may further comprise additional surfactants in additionto the surfactant discussed above, i.e. the surfactant present in thedisperse phase or oil phase. In particular the continuous phasecomprising the hydrogel forming polymer may further comprise one or moresurfactants. Surfactants which may be present in the continuous phaseare any of the surfactants described herein as being suitable forinclusion in the aqueous (continuous) phase of the composition. Suitablythe continuous phase comprises one or more anionic surfactant, forexample at least one surfactant selected from fatty acid salts, alkylsulfates and bile salts, particularly the surfactant in the continuousphase is or comprises an alkyl sulfate, for example sodium dodecylsulfate.

The active ingredient may be an immunosuppressant, a hydroxylaseinhibitor, or an anti-inflammatory; optionally the active ingredient iscyclosporin A, hydralazine or mesalazine. Cyclosporin or mesalamine mayconveniently be used for example in a process having steps (i) to (vi)described above. Hydralazine may conveniently be used for example in aprocess having steps (i) to (vi), (i) to (v) or (a) to (e) describedabove, in particular a process having steps (i) to (v) above.

The core may further comprise a surfactant, optionally wherein thesurfactant is an anionic surfactant, optionally selected from alkylsulphates, carboxylates or phospholipids, or a non-ionic surfactant,optionally selected from sorbitan-based surfactants, PEG-fatty acids, orglyceryl fatty acids, or poloxamers, or a combination thereof. Hence thepharmaceutical formulation of all aspects of the invention may compriseat least the following features, a core and a first coating, wherein thecore comprises an active ingredient and a surfactant, and the coatingcomprises or is a water soluble cellulose ether.

In embodiments where the core is in the form of a solid colloid, thesurfactant may be in the disperse phase or the continuous phase. Thesurfactant in the continuous phase may be an anionic surfactant, forexample at least one surfactant selected from fatty acid salts and bilesalts, particularly an alkyl sulphate, for example sodium dodecylsulphate. The surfactant in the disperse phase may be a non-ionicsurfactant.

In embodiments the core comprises both a non-ionic surfactant and ananionic surfactant. The anionic surfactant, for example sodium dodecylsulphate, may be in the disperse phase and the non-ionic surfactant, forexample polyethoxylated castor oil may be in the disperse phase.Alternatively, the anionic surfactant, for example sodium dodecylsulphate, may be in the continuous phase and the non-ionic surfactant,for example polyethoxylated castor oil may be in the disperse phase.

In embodiments the core further comprises a combination of excipientsselected from: a non-ionic surfactant and a solvent; an anionicsurfactant and a solvent; an anionic surfactant, a non-ionic surfactantand a solvent; a non-ionic surfactant and an oil; an anionic surfactantand an oil; a non-ionic surfactant, an anionic surfactant and an oil;and a non-ionic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, a solvent and an oil.Preferably, the anionic surfactant is an alkyl sulphate, for examplesodium dodecyl sulphate, the non-ionic surfactant polyethoxylated castoroil, the oil is a medium chain mono-, di- and/or tri-glyceride, forexample caprylic/capric triglyceride, and the solvent is2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol.

The pharmaceutical formulation may further comprise an excipientselected from: a surfactant, a solubiliser, a permeability enhancer, adisintegrant, a crystalisation inhibitor, a pH modifier, a stabiliser,or a combination thereof.

The core of a pharmaceutical formulation of the invention may comprise adisperse phase being or comprising:

a pharmaceutically active ingredient, for example cyclosporin,hydralazine or mesalamine;

a medium chain mono- di- or tri-glyceride, for example caprylic/caprictriglyceride;

a non-ionic surfactant, for example a polyethoxylated castor oil; and

a solvent, for example 2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol and may further comprisea continuous phase being or comprising:

an anionic surfactant, for example at least one surfactant selected fromfatty acid salts and bile salts, particularly an alkyl sulphate, forexample sodium dodecyl sulphate

a hydrogel forming polymer matrix which is or comprises a hydrocolloidselected from carrageenan, gelatin, agar and pectin, or a combinationthereof optionally selected from gelatin and agar or a combinationthereof, more optionally the polymer of the a hydrogel forming polymermatrix is or comprises gelatin; and

optionally a plasticiser, for example a plasticiser selected fromglycerin, a polyol for example sorbitol, polyethylene glycol andtriethyl citrate or a mixture thereof, particularly sorbitol.

In a variant of the formulation described in the immediately precedingparagraph, the disperse phase is free, or substantially free of activeingredient, the active ingredient being dissolved in the continuousphase.

In one embodiment the formulation comprises a core and a coating outsidethe core, wherein the core is in the form of a solid colloid, thecolloid comprising a continuous phase and a disperse phase, wherein thedisperse phase is or comprises:

a hydrophobic active, for example cyclosporin A;

a medium chain mono- di- and/or tri-glyceride, for examplecaprylic/capric triglyceride;

a polyethoxylated castor oil; and

a co-solvent, for example 2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol;

and wherein the continuous phase is or comprises:

a hydrogel-forming polymer matrix which is or comprises a hydrocolloidselected from carrageenan, gelatin, agar and pectin, or a combinationthereof optionally selected from gelatin and agar or a combinationthereof, more optionally the polymer of the water-soluble polymer matrixis or comprises gelatin;

optionally a plasticiser, optionally a plasticiser selected fromglycerin, a polyol for example sorbitol, polyethylene glycol andtriethyl citrate or a mixture thereof, particularly sorbitol; and

an anionic surfactant, for example at least one surfactant selected fromfatty acid salts and bile salts, particularly an alkyl sulphate, forexample sodium dodecyl sulphate;

and wherein the coating on the core is any of the coatings describedherein. Suitably the coating comprises a first coating and a secondcoating outside the first coating; and wherein

the first coating is the coating which is or comprises a water-solublecellulose ether as described above; and

the second coating is or comprises a coating, suitably a polymericcoating, as defined above to control or modulate release of cyclosporinA from the formulation.

In embodiments comprising a first coating and a second coating, forexample as mentioned in the immediately preceding paragraph, aparticular first coating is or comprises hydroxypropylmethyl celluloseand a particular second coating outside the first coating is orcomprises a pH independent polymer, for example ethyl cellulose; moreparticularly the second coating is or comprises ethyl cellulose andoptionally a polysaccharide selected from water soluble and naturallyoccurring polysaccacharides, for example pectin or another water-solublenaturally occurring polysaccharide. The second coating may thereforecontain pectin or another said polysaccharide or it may be substantiallyfree of pectin and other said polysaccharides. There are thereforedisclosed second coatings which comprise ethylcellulose as a controlledrelease polymer and which further comprise pectin or another saidpolysaccharide as well as second coatings which comprise ethylcelluloseas a controlled release polymer and which do not further comprise pectinor another said polysaccharide.

The core may comprise a hydrogel forming polymer comprising gelatin,optionally in an amount of 300 to 700 mg/g, the core further comprisingmedium chain mono, di and/or tri-glycerides, optionally in an amount of20 to 200 mg/g, wherein the pharmaceutical formulation further comprisesthe following components:

solvent, for example 2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol, optionally in an amount of150 to 250 mg/g;

non-ionic surfactant, for example a polyethoxylated castor oil,optionally in an amount of 80 to 200 mg/g; and

anionic surfactant, for example sodium dodecyl suplphate, in an amountof 15 to 50 mg/g.

Where the core is a colloid, the active ingredient may be dissolved inthe continuous phase of the colloid.

It is not a requirement of the invention that the core contain adisperse phase: the core may have a single phase which is for example ahydrogel-forming polymer matrix, the matrix having an active ingredientdissolved therein. For example, the active ingredient may behydralazine.

The invention includes within its scope formulations wherein the core isa colloid having a disperse phase and the continuous phase (matrixphase) of the colloid further includes dispersed particles of apharmaceutically active ingredient, for example microparticles ornanoparticles. The disperse phase and continuous phase may otherwise beas described elsewhere in this specification,

The pharmaceutical formulation of the invention and/or the core may bein the form of a minibead. It may be that the core is a minibead and thefirst coating and, where applicable, the second coating in conjunctionwith the core are in the form of a minibead. However, it may be possiblefor the core to be a minibead and the formulation not to be a minibead.The formulation may additionally comprise a multiplicity of minibeads.Hence the invention contemplates a minibead with the features of thepharmaceutical formulations disclosed herein.

The formulation or the minibead may have a largest cross sectionaldimension of a core of from about 0.01 mm to about 5 mm, for examplefrom 1 mm to 5 mm, as in the case of from 1 mm to 3 mm or 1 mm to 2 mm.The minibead may be spheroidal. The spheroidal minibeads may have anaspect ratio of no more than 1.5, for example from 1.1 to 1.5.

In embodiments the pharmaceutical formulation does not comprise anantigen selected from inactivated and attenuated microorganisms.

The pharmaceutical formulation of the invention may be for oraladministration. The formulation may be formulated into a unit dosageform for oral administration comprising from 0.1 mg to 1000 mg,optionally from 1 mg to 500 mg, for example 10 mg to 300 mg, or 25 to250 mg suitably about 25 mg, 35 mg, about 75 mg, about 180 mg, about 210mg or about 250 mg of pharmaceutically active ingredient. Suitably theformulation is in a multiple minibead unit dosage form selected fromsoft or hard gel capsules, gelatin capsules, HPMC capsules, compressedtablets or sachets. The minibeads may be as described elsewhere herein.

A further aspect of the invention provides a formulation describedherein for use as a medicament. The active ingredient may be animmunosuppressant, for example cyclosporin A; the formulation maycomprise at least one further active ingredient, for example at leastone further immunosuppressant. In particular there is provided aformulation in which the active ingredient is an immunosuppressant foruse in the treatment, e.g. prevention, of a condition of the GIT. Theformulation may be for use in the treatment of an inflammatory boweldisease, irritable bowel syndrome, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis,celiac disease, graft-versus-host disease, gastrointestinalgraft-versus-host disease, gastroenteritis, duodenitis, jejunitis,ileitis, peptic ulcer, Curling's ulcer, appendicitis, colitis,pseudomembraneous colitis, diverticulosis, diverticulitis, pouchitis,endometriosis, colorectal carcinoma and adenocarcinoma.

In embodiments where the pharmaceutical formulation does not comprise asecond coating, the formulation may be for use in the treatment ofconditions that affect the small intestine. Such formulations may beable to treat conditions selected from celiac disease, GVHD or Crohn'sdisease.

The invention additionally provides a method for administering anpharmaceutically active ingredient to a subject, comprising orallyadministering to the subject a formulation described herein. The methodmay be performed in the treatment, e.g. prevention, of disease. Thesubject may be a mammal, in particular a human. Also provided is amethod for treating a condition of the GI tract in a subject, preferablya human, in need thereof comprising orally administering to the mammal atherapeutically effective amount of a formulation described herein andwherein the pharmaceutically active ingredient is one that ispotentially effective in the method. For example, the condition may beinflammatory and the active ingredient an immunosuppressant, for examplecyclosporin A. Conditions of the GI tract which may be treated orprevented include the conditions disclosed herein.

A further aspect of the invention provides the use of a formulationdescribed herein for use in the manufacture of a medicament for thetreatment, e.g. prevention, of a condition of the GIT. Conditions of theGI tract include those disclosed herein.

The invention also contemplates a method of treating a conditionselected from inflammatory bowel disease, irritable bowel disease,Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, celiac disease, graft vs hostdisease, gastrointestinal graft-versus-host disease, gastroenteritis,duodenitis, jejunitis, ileitis, peptic ulcer, Curling's ulcer,appendicitis, colitis, pseudomembraneous colitis, diverticulosis,diverticulitis, endometriosis, colorectal carcinoma and adenocarcinoma,wherein the method comprises administering a pharmaceutical formulationof the invention.

In another aspect the invention provides a method of treating conditionsthat affect the small intestine, wherein the method comprisesadministering a pharmaceutical formulation of the invention which doesnot comprise a second coating. The conditions of the small intestine maybe selected from celiac disease, GVHD or Crohn's disease.

In an aspect of the invention there is provided a process for making apharmaceutical formulation, the process comprising the step of:

coating a core with a coating comprising HPMC wherein the weight gaindue to the coating is from 0.5% to 20% of the weight of thepharmaceutical formulation. The core may comprise a pharmaceuticallyactive ingredient and may be a core as described in this specification.

The process of the immediately preceding paragraph may further compriseproducing the core, wherein producing the core comprises the steps of:

mixing a non-aqueous phase with an aqueous phase to form a solidcolloid, wherein at least one of the aqueous phase or the non-aqueousphase comprise a pharmaceutically active ingredient, wherein

(a) the non-aqueous phase comprises a surfactant; and(b) the aqueous phase comprises a hydrogel forming polymer; and

then causing or allowing the emulsion to solidify.

Included in the invention is a method of producing more than one batchof a multiplicity of solid unit dosage forms comprising a core, a firstcoating and a second coating outside the first coating, wherein the corecomprises an active ingredient and a hydrogel forming polymer matrix,the first coating comprises or is a water-soluble cellulose ether, andthe second coating comprises or is a delayed release polymer, furtherwherein the first coating is present in an amount to provide each of themore than one batches with a plot of % release of the active ingredientagainst time with a difference of less than 5 units of % release at anytime point in the plot, wherein the method comprises, forming a batch ofcores, coating the cores with the first coating in an amount to providea weight gain due to the coating of from 0.5% and 20% and coating thecore with the second coating to provide the one or more batches.

In embodiments the coating is present in an amount to provide a weightgain of from 8% to 12% or any other weight gain mentioned herein.

A method of minimising inter-batch variability in a dissolution profileof a multiplicity of solid unit dosage forms from two or more batches,the method comprising:

forming two or more batches of a multiplicity of solid unit dosageforms; and

coating the solid unit dosage forms of each batch with a coatingcomprising hydroxylpropyl methyl cellulose, wherein the weight gain dueto the coating is from 0.5% to 20%.

Where this specification mentions a plurality of batches, e.g. two ormore batches, the number of batches may be at least 100, optionally atleast 1000.

Another aspect of the invention is a method of avoiding systemic sideeffects of cyclosporin, the method comprising providing a compositioncomprising cyclosporin and a coating present in an amount correspondingto a weight gain of 0.5% to 20% of hydroxylpropyl methylcellulose. Themethod may be used in the treatment of a condition selected frominflammatory bowel disease, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease,ulcerative colitis, celiac disease, graft vs host disease,gastrointestinal graft-versus-host disease, gastroenteritis, duodenitis,jejunitis, ileitis, peptic ulcer, Curling's ulcer, appendicitis,colitis, pseudomembraneous colitis, diverticulosis, diverticulitis,endometriosis, colorectal carcinoma and adenocarcinoma.

The coating of the invention increases the rate and/or extent of releaseof the active ingredient from the formulation compared to acorresponding formulation without the coating. The formulations of theinvention are therefore expected to provide high concentrations of theactive ingredient in-vivo following oral administration, which mayimprove the oral bioavailability of the active, thereby enhancing thetherapeutic benefit of the active ingredient. Enhanced bioavailabilitymay also enable a lower dose of the active to be administered andthereby reduce the size of a unit dosage form or reduce the number ofunit dosage form administered to a patient (for example by reducing thenumber and/or size of capsules required). Accordingly the inventionprovides the use of formulation of the invention to increase thebioavailability of an active ingredient. The invention further providesa method for increasing the oral bioavailability of an active agent themethod comprising administering to a patient a formulation of theinvention.

Formulations of the invention which release the active in the stomachand/or upper GI tract (e.g. the small intestine) may be particularlybeneficial for improving bioavailability. Accordingly, formulations ofthe invention which release high amounts of the active in the first 2 to4 hours of the dissolution test described herein are preferred. Suitablysuch formulations may be the formulations described herein comprising afirst coat (e.g. a water-soluble cellulose ether) and no second coating.

For certain active ingredients it may be desirable to limit or delayrelease of the active from the formulation until the formulation haspassed through the stomach and upper GI tract. The formulations of theinvention comprising a second coat may be particularly suitable for suchapplications. The second coat acts to delay release from theformulation, whilst the presence of the coating of the invention (e.g.HPMC) increases the amount of active released when the formulationreleases the active in the lower GI tract. The period of delay to therelease of the active as a result of the presence of the second coatingcan be tailored by appropriate selection of the nature or amount ofsecond coating used. For a given second coating material a higher weightgain of coating will generally increase the time period betweenadministration of the formulation and release of the active. Theformulations of the invention can therefore be used to provide highlevels of release of active agent at very specific parts of the GI tractto provide, for example, topical treatment to diseased tissue within theGI tract. Such delayed release formulations may be particularlybeneficial when the active has undesirable side effects which may arisefrom systemic absorption higher in the GI tract.

Included in this description by reference are the subject matters of theappended claims. The description is therefore to be read together withthe claims and features mentioned in the claims are applicable to thesubject matters of the description. For example, a feature described ina process claim is applicable also to products mentioned in thedescription, where the feature is manifested in the product. Forexample, a feature mentioned in a product claim is applicable also torelevant process subject matters contained in this description.Similarly, a feature mentioned in the description in the context of aprocess is applicable also to products mentioned in the description,where the feature is manifested in the product. Also, a featurementioned in the description in the context of a product is applicablealso to relevant process subject matters contained in this description.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Embodiments of the invention are further described hereinafter withreference to the accompanying drawings, in which:

FIG. 1 is a graph plotting % of cyclosporin in solution against timeover 4 hours and showing the release profiles of minibeads of Example 1and Examples 2a-c with differing levels of a coating comprisinghydroxypropyl methylcellulose compared to the release profile of a coreof Example 1 which does not have a hydroxypropyl methylcellulosecoating.

FIG. 2 is a graph plotting % of cyclosporin in solution against timeover 24 hours and showing the release profiles of minibeads of Example 1and Examples 2a-c with differing levels of a coating comprisinghydroxypropyl methylcellulose compared to the release profile of a coreof Example 1 which does not have a hydroxypropyl methylcellulosecoating.

FIG. 3 is a graph plotting % of cyclosporin released against time over24 hours and showing the release profiles of minibeads of Examples 5b-dwith differing levels of a coating comprising hydroxypropylmethylcellulose compared to the release profile of a minibead of Example5a which does not have a hydroxypropyl methylcellulose coating.

FIG. 4 is a graph plotting % of cyclosporin released against time over24 hours and showing the release profiles of minibeads of Example 1 andExamples 5f and 5g with differing levels of a coating comprisinghydroxypropyl methylcellulose compared to the release profile of aminibead of Example 5e which does not have a hydroxypropylmethylcellulose coating.

FIG. 5 is a graph plotting % of cyclosporin released against time over24 hours and showing the release profiles of minibeads of Examples 5iand 5j with differing levels of a coating comprising hydroxypropylmethylcellulose compared to the release profile of a minibead of Example5h which does not have a hydroxypropyl methylcellulose coating.

FIG. 6 is a graph plotting % of cyclosporin released against time over24 hours and showing the release profiles of minibeads of Examples 9band 9c with differing levels of a hydroxypropyl methylcellulose coatingcompared to the release profile of a minibead of Example 9a which doesnot have a hydroxypropyl methylcellulose coating.

FIG. 7 is a graph containing the release profiles of FIG. 3 and FIG. 6in a single graph.

FIG. 8 is a graph plotting % of mesalazine released against time over 24hours and showing the release profiles of minibeads of Examples 12b and12c with differing levels of a coating comprising hydroxypropylmethylcellulose compared to the release profile of a minibead of Example12a which does not have a hydroxypropyl methylcellulose coating.

FIG. 9 is a graph plotting % of hydralazine released against time over24 hours and showing the release profiles of minibeads of Examples 14b-cand 14e-f with differing levels of a coating comprising hydroxypropylmethylcellulose and differing levels of a Sureleas/Pectin coatingcompared to the release profiles of a minibeads of Example 14a and 14dwhich do not have a hydroxypropyl methylcellulose coating.

FIG. 10 is a graph plotting % of celecoxib released against time over 18hours and showing the release profiles of minibeads of Examples 16 witha coating comprising hydroxypropyl methylcellulose and a Sureleasecoating compared to the release profile of minibeads which do not have ahydroxypropyl methylcellulose coating.

FIG. 11 is a graph plotting % of cyclosporin released against time over24 hours and showing the reduction in the variability of the releaseprofiles of different batches of minibeads with a coating comprisinghydroxypropyl methylcellulose and a Surelease/Pectin second coating.

FIG. 12 is a scanning electron microscope image of a cross section of aminibead of the invention.

FIG. 13 is a enlarged image of a portion of the image in FIG. 12 showingtwo distinct layers of coatings.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The term “treatment”, and the therapies encompassed by this invention,include the following and combinations thereof: (1) reducing the risk ofor inhibiting, e.g. delaying, initiation and/or progression of, a state,disorder or condition; (2) preventing, e.g. reducing the risk of, ordelaying the appearance of clinical symptoms of a state, disorder orcondition developing in a patient (e.g. human or animal) that may beafflicted with or predisposed to the state, disorder or condition butdoes not yet experience or display clinical or subclinical symptoms ofthe state, disorder or condition; (3) inhibiting the state, disorder orcondition (e.g., arresting, reducing or delaying the development of thedisease, or a relapse thereof in case of maintenance treatment, of atleast one clinical or subclinical symptom thereof); and/or (4) relievingthe condition (e.g. causing regression of the state, disorder orcondition or at least one of its clinical or subclinical symptoms).Where the formulation of the invention is used in the treatment of apatient, treatment contemplates any one or more of: maintaining thehealth of the patient; restoring or improving the health of the patient;and delaying the progression of the disorder. The benefit to a patientto be treated may be either statistically significant or at leastperceptible to the patient or to the physician. It will be understoodthat a medicament will not necessarily produce a clinical effect inevery patient to whom it is administered, and this paragraph is to beunderstood accordingly. The formulations and methods described hereinare of use for therapy and/or prophylaxis of disease.

The treatments may include maintenance therapy of patients who havesuffered a disorder and whose condition has subsequently improved, e.g.because of treatment. Such patients may or may not suffer a symptomaticdisorder. Maintenance therapy aims to arrest, reduce or delay(re-)occurrence or progression of a disorder.

“Effective amount” means an amount sufficient to achieve the desiredtreatment, e.g. result in the desired therapeutic or prophylacticresponse. The therapeutic or prophylactic response can be any responsethat a user (e.g., a clinician) will recognise as an effective responseto the therapy. It is further within the skill of one of ordinary skillin the art to determine appropriate treatment duration, appropriatedoses, and any potential combination treatments, based upon anevaluation of therapeutic or prophylactic response.

The terms “dry” and “dried” as applied to formulations of the disclosuremay each include reference to formulations containing less than 5% freewater by weight, e.g. less than 1% free water by weight. Primarily,however, “dry” and “dried” as applied to formulations of the disclosuremean that the hydrogel present in the initial solidified formulation hasdried sufficiently to form a rigid formulation. Where a solid colloid isreferred to this also refers to a dried colloid according to thedefinition herein.

Ingredients and excipients of the described formulations are suitablefor the intended purpose. For example, pharmaceutical formulationscomprise pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients.

If not otherwise stated, ingredients, components, excipients etc. of theformulation of the invention are suitable for one or more of theintended purposes discussed elsewhere herein.

For the avoidance of doubt, it is hereby stated that the informationdisclosed earlier in this specification under the heading “Background”is relevant to the invention and is to be read as part of the disclosureof the invention.

Throughout the description and claims of this specification, the words“comprise” and “contain” and variations of them mean “including but notlimited to”, and they are not intended to (and do not) exclude othermoieties, additives, components, integers or steps. Throughout thedescription and claims of this specification, the singular encompassesthe plural unless the context otherwise requires. In particular, wherethe indefinite article is used, the specification is to be understood ascontemplating plurality as well as singularity, unless the contextrequires otherwise.

Features, integers, characteristics, compounds, chemical moieties orgroups described in conjunction with a particular aspect, embodiment orexample of the invention are to be understood to be applicable to anyother aspect, embodiment or example described herein unless incompatibletherewith. All of the features disclosed in this specification(including any accompanying claims, abstract and drawings), and/or allof the steps of any method or process so disclosed, may be combined inany combination, except combinations where at least some of suchfeatures and/or steps are mutually exclusive. The invention is notrestricted to the details of any foregoing embodiments. The inventionextends to any novel one, or any novel combination, of the featuresdisclosed in this specification (including any accompanying claims,abstract and drawings), or to any novel one, or any novel combination,of the steps of any method or process so disclosed.

The reader's attention is directed to all papers and documents which arefiled concurrently with or previous to this specification in connectionwith this application and which are open to public inspection with thisspecification, and the contents of all such papers and documents areincorporated herein by reference.

Dissolution Profile

Reference to “a two stage dissolution test using a USP Apparatus II witha paddle speed of 75 rpm and a dissolution medium temperature of 37° C.;wherein for the first 2 hours of the dissolution test the dissolutionmedium is 750 ml of 0.1 N HCl, and for the remainder of the dissolutiontest 250 ml of 0.2M tribasic sodium phosphate containing 2% SDS is addedto the dissolution medium which is then adjusted to pH 6.8” is anin-vitro test carried out in accordance with the USP <711> Dissolutiontest using Apparatus II (paddle apparatus) operated with a paddle speedof 75 rpm and with the dissolution medium at a temperature of 37° C.±5°C. At the start of the test (t=0) the sample is placed in thedissolution acidic medium. After 2 hours an aliquot of the medium istaken for subsequent analysis and immediately (suitably within 5minutes) the second stage of the dissolution test is initiated. In thesecond stage 250 ml of 0.2M tribasic sodium phosphate containing 2%sodium dodecyl sulphate (SDS) is added to the dissolution medium and thepH adjusted to 6.8±0.05 using 2N NaOH or 2N HCl as required. Samples ofthe dissolution medium are taken at time points during the second stageof the test, for example at 4, 6, 12 and 24 hours from the start of thetest (i.e. from t=0 at the start of the first stage). The samples areanalysed for the active dissolved in the medium. The “% released” is theamount of active (e.g. cyclosporin) in solution in the respectivedissolution medium at a particular time point relative to the amount ofactive in the composition at the start of the test. The concentration ofactive in a sample may be measured using standard techniques, such asReverse Phase HPLC as illustrated in the Examples. References to “a twostage dissolution test” refer to this test method.

Formulation

The formulation comprises a matrix and a pharmaceutically activeingredient. The matrix may be formed with a hydrogel-forming polymer,and may contain additional excipient(s) to the polymer. The activeingredient is contained within the matrix. The active ingredient may bein solution or in suspension, or in a combination thereof; however theinvention is not limited to formulations comprising a solution orsuspension of the active and it includes, for example, activeingredients encapsulated in liposomes or cyclodextrin. The matrix maycontain inclusions in which the active ingredient is comprised; forexample, the inclusions may comprise a hydrophobic medium in which theactive ingredient is dissolved or suspended. An active ingredient maytherefore be directly dissolved or suspended in the matrix, or it may bedissolved or suspended indirectly in the matrix by way of inclusions inwhich the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended.

The formulation, therefore, comprises a matrix-forming polymer, inparticular a hydrogel-forming polymer. The matrix of the formulation maybe or comprise a polymer matrix comprising a polymer selected from awater-permeable polymer, a water-swellable polymer and a biodegradablepolymer. In particular, the matrix is or comprises a hydrogel-formingpolymer described in more detail below.

Modified release of the active ingredient from the formulation may beachieved by virtue of the properties of the matrix material. For examplethe matrix may be a permeable or erodible polymer within which theactive ingredient is contained, e.g. dissolved or suspended; followingoral administration the matrix is gradually dissolved or eroded therebyreleasing the active ingredient from the matrix. Erosion may be achievedby biodegradation of a biodegradable polymer matrix. Where the matrix ispermeable, water permeates the matrix enabling the drug to diffuse fromthe matrix. A matrix formed with a hydrogel-forming polymer maytherefore include a modified release polymer. As such modified releasepolymers may be mentioned cellulose derivatives, for examplehydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, poly(lactic acid), poly(glycoloic)acid,poly(lactic-co glycolic acid copolymers), polyethylene glycol blockco-polymers, polyorthoesters, polyanhydrides, polyanhydride esters,polyanhydride imides, polyamides and polyphosphazines.

Water Soluble Cellulose Ether Coating

The invention provides pharmaceutical formulations that have a coatingwhich is or comprises a water-soluble cellulose ether. The inventionprovides pharmaceutical formulations that have a polymer coating,wherein the polymer is or comprises a water-soluble cellulose ether. Thewater-soluble cellulose ether may be, for example selected from methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxylpropyl cellulose andhydroxypropylmethyl cellulose.

Suitably the material of the first coating (i.e. the sub-coating) isdifferent to the second coating on the composition. For example, wherethe first coating is or comprises a water-soluble ester of a celluloseether, the major component(s) (e.g. more than 50%) of the second coatingis or comprises a different polymer to that of the first coating.Accordingly, the first and second coatings suitably provide two layersof material as part of the composition. It is to be understood that whenthe second coating comprises a mixture of components, minor componentsof the outer second coating may the same as the material of the firstcoating. By way of example, when the first coating is or comprises HPMCand the second coating comprises ethyl cellulose, the ethyl cellulosemay optionally further comprise a minor amount (e.g. less than 50%, 40%,30% or 20%) of the first coating material, HPMC in this example. In suchembodiments the sub-coat and the second coating are considered to bedifferent.

The water-soluble cellulose ether may be a water-soluble cellulose etherselected from an alkyl cellulose, for example methyl cellulose, ethylmethyl cellulose; a hydroxyalkyl cellulose, for example hydroxyethylcellulose (available as Cellosize™ and Natrosol™) hydroxypropylcellulose (available as Klucel™) or hydroxymethyl cellulose; ahydroxyalkyl alkyl cellulose, for example hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose(NEMC), hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose (available as Methocel™,Pharmacoat™, Benecel™) or ethyl hydroxyethyl cellulose (EHEC); and acarboxyalkyl cellulose, for example carboxymethyl cellulose (CMC).Suitably the water-soluble cellulose ether may, for example be selectedfrom methyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxylpropyl celluloseand hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose.

The water-soluble cellulose ether may be a low viscosity polymer whichis suitable for application as a film or coating to the formulation. Theviscosity of the polymer may be from about 2 to about 60 mPa·s, forexample a viscosity of: about 2 to about 20 mPa·s; about to 2 to about 8mPa·s; more suitably a viscosity of about 4 to about 10 mPa·s, forexample about 4 to about 6 mPa·s. Alternatively, the viscosity of thepolymer may fall outside any or all of the just-mentioned ranges, forexample be above 20 mPa·s. Alternatively, the viscosity of the polymermay fall outside any or all of the just-mentioned ranges, for example beabove 20 mPa·s. The viscosity of the polymer may be determined bymeasuring the viscosity of a 2% solution of the polymer in water at 20″Cusing a Ubbelode viscometer using ASTM standard methods (D1347 andD2363).

The water soluble cellulose ether may be a water-solublehydroxypropylmethyl cellulose (HPMC or hypromellose). HPMC is preparedby modifying cellulose to substitute hydroxy groups with methoxy andhydroxypropyl groups. Each anhydroglucose unit in the cellulose chainhas three hydroxyl groups. The amount of substituent groups on theanhydroglucose units may be expressed as the degree of substitution. Ifall three hydroxyl groups on each unit are substituted, the degree ofsubstitution is 3. The number of substituent groups on the ringdetermines the properties of the HPMC. The degree of substitution mayalso be expressed as the weight % of the methoxy and hydroxypropylgroups present. Suitably the HPMC has from about 19 to about 30% methoxysubstitution and from about 7 to about 12% hydroxypropyl substitution.Particularly the HPMC has 25 to 30% methoxy substitution and 7 to 12%hydroxypropyl substitution. Suitably the HPMC Is a low viscosity HPMCwhich is suitable for application as a film or coating to theformulation. The viscosity of the HPMC is suitably from about 2 to 60mPa·s, for example about 2 to about 20 mPa·s, more suitably a viscosityof about 4 to about 10 mPa·s. The viscosity of the HPMC is determined bymeasuring the viscosity of a 2% solution of the HPMC hi water at 20° C.using a Ubbelode viscometer using ASTM standard methods (D1347 andD2363). Such HPMC is available as for example Methocel™, for exampleMethocel™ E, including Methocel™ E5.

When the first coating is or comprises a water-soluble derivative of acellulose ether, the derivative may, for example be a water-solubleester of a cellulose ether. Water-soluble esters of cellulose ethers arewell known and may comprise esters of a cellulose ether, formed with oneor more suitable acylating agent(s). Acylation agents may be, forexample suitable acids or acid anhydrides or acyl halides. Accordinglythe ester of a cellulose ether may contain a single ester moiety or twoor more ester moieties to give a mixed ester. Examples of water-solubleesters of cellulose ethers may be water-soluble phthalate, acetate,succinate, propionate or butyrate esters of a cellulose ether (forexample HPMC). Suitably the water-soluble ester of a cellulose ether isa water-soluble phthalate, acetate-succinate, propionate,acetate-propionate or acetate-butyrate ester of a cellulose ether (forexample HPMC).

In one embodiment the water-soluble ester of a cellulose ether may be orcomprise a water-soluble ester of any of the water-soluble celluloseethers described above in relation to the sub-coating.

Particular water-soluble esters of cellulose ethers are water-solubleesters of HPMC. Esters of HPMC which are soluble in water at a pHgreater than 5.5 may be or comprise hydroxypropyl methylcellulosephthalate (HPMCP), or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose acetate succinate(HPMCAS) in which the presence of ionisable carboxyl groups causes thepolymer to solubilize at high pH (>5.5 for the LF grade and >6.8 for theHF grade). These polymers are commercially available from Shin-EtsuChemical Co. Ltd.

The cellulose ether-containing coating may comprise or be hypromellose,e.g. it may be made of a mixture of hypromellose, titanium dioxide andpolyethylene glycol; the coating may comprise at least 20 wt %hypromellose and optionally at least 50% or at least 75 wt %hypromellose, e.g. at least 80 wt % or at least 85 wt % or 90 wt %hypromellose. The coating material used to form the coating maytherefore comprise a dry weight percentage of hypromellose mentioned inthe preceding sentence.

If it is desired for the coating to use a mixture of hypromellose,titanium dioxide and polyethylene glycol, commercial productscorresponding to such mixtures are available including Opadry White, aproduct commercialised by Colorcon. More generally, there may bementioned various products commercialised under the trade name Opadryand Opadry II. Further non limiting examples include Opadry YS-1-7706-Gwhite, Opadry Yellow 03692357, Opadry Blue 03690842). These formulationsare available as dry film coating formulations that can be diluted inwater shortly before use. Opadry and Opadry II formulations comprise acellulosic film forming polymer (e.g., HPMC and/or HPC), and may containpolydextrose, maltodextrin, a plasticizer (e.g., triacetin, polyethyleneglycol), polysorbate 80, a colorant (e.g., titanium dioxide, one or moredyes or lakes), and/or other suitable film-forming polymers (e.g.,acrylate-methacrylate copolymers). Suitable OPADRY or OPADRY IIformulations may comprise a plasticizer and one or more of maltodextrin,and polydextrose (including but not limited to a) triacetin andpolydextrose or maltodextrin or lactose, or b) polyethylene glycol andpolydextrose or maltodextrin). Particularly preferred commercialproducts are Opadry White (HPMC/HPC-based) and Opadry II White(PVA/PEG-based).

The cellulose ether-containing coating may also be applied as a simplesolution comprising water and the polymer of the first coating. Forexample when the polymer is an HPMC, for example such as Methocel, thefirst coating may be applied to the core as an aqueous solution ordispersion of the HPMC. Optionally the coating solution may includeother solvents such as an alcohol. Alternatively the coating may beapplied as a solution or dispersion in a volatile organic solvent.

Suitably the coating that contains a water soluble cellulose ether ispresent in an amount corresponding to a weight gain of the formulationdue to the coating of from 0.5% to 40% (for example from 0.5% to 30%;from 0.5% to 20%; from 1% to 25%; from 1% to 15%; from 1% to 6%; from 1%to 4%; from 4% to 6%; from 6% to 10%; from 9% to 15%; or from 12% to15%) by weight based upon the weight of the formulation prior toapplying the coating.

In another embodiment the first coating that contains a water-solublecellulose ether is present in an amount corresponding to a weight gaindue to the first coating in a range selected from 9 to 30%, suitably 9%to 20%, or particularly 10% to 15% by weight based upon the weight ofthe formulation prior to applying the coating.

Suitably the coating that contains a water soluble cellulose etherprovides a coating thickness on the formulation of from about 10 μm toabout 1 mm, for example, from about 10 μm to about 500 μm, from about 50μm to about 1 mm, or about from about 50 μm to about 500 μm. Thethickness may therefore be from about 100 μm to about 1 mm, e.g. 100 μmto about 750 μm or about 100 μm to about 500 μm. The thickness may befrom about 250 μm to about 1 mm, e.g. about 250 μm to about 750 μm or250 μm to about 500 μm. The thickness may be from about 500 μm to about1 mm, e.g. about 750 μm to about 1 mm or about 500 μm to about 750 μm.The thickness may therefore be from about 10 μm to about 100 μm, e.g.from about 10 μm to about 50 μm or about 50 μm to about 100 μm.

When the first coating comprises a water-soluble cellulose ether thecellulose ether(s) suitably forms at least 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%or 90% by weight of the dry weight of the first coating. Alternativelythe water-soluble cellulose ether is the first coating.

It is preferred to dry the formulation of the invention before the firstcoating that contains a water-soluble cellulose ether is applied, as isdescribed in more detail below in relation to the coating process.

It has been found that applying to a core comprising a pharmaceuticallyactive ingredient a sub-coating, referred to elsewhere in theapplication as the subcoat (hence the subcoat and the first coating areequivalent), that contains a water soluble cellulose ether prior toapplying a delayed release coating provides unexpected advantages. Thepresence of such a sub-coating has been found to enhance the dissolutionproperties of the delayed release formulations according to theinvention. In particular the presence of such a sub-coating has beenfound to increase the rate of release of the active ingredient from theformulation and also to increase the amount of the active ingredientreleased in a set time period compared to formulations prepared withoutusing such a sub-coating. These findings are unexpected, because itwould have been expected that the presence of a sub-coating in additionto a delayed release outer coating would act to delay or inhibit releaseof drug from the formulation and, at a given time, for there to be lessdrug released, because there is a thicker coating present. However, asillustrated in the Examples, contrary to these expectations both theextent and rate of release of active ingredient are increased comparedto formulations without such a sub-coating. Accordingly, delayed releaseformulation formulations according to the invention which comprise asub-coat that comprises or is a water-soluble cellulose ether and adelayed release coating outside the sub-coat, provide a uniquedissolution profile. The presence of such a sub-coating has also beenfound to reduce batch-to-batch variability, particularly when the coreis in the form of a minibead. A sub-coating that comprises or is awater-soluble cellulose ether may therefore also reduce intra- andinter-patient variability as a result of a more consistent dissolutionprofile. The unique properties of sub-coated formulations according tothe invention (particularly the dissolution profile) are expected tocontribute to favourable pharmacokinetic properties of the formulationsaccording to the invention.

Accordingly in an embodiment there is provided a formulation comprisinga pharmaceutically active ingredient, wherein the formulation furthercomprises a first coating; and wherein the first coating is or comprisesa water-soluble cellulose ether.

The formulation may have a second coating comprising or being a delayedrelease polymer.

Accordingly in an embodiment there is provided a formulation comprisinga pharmaceutically active ingredient, wherein the formulation furthercomprises a first coating and a second coating outside the firstcoating; and wherein

the first coating is or comprises a water-soluble cellulose ether; and

the second coating is or comprises a delayed release coating, e.g. is orcomprises a delayed release polymer.

An aspect of the invention resides in a multiple minibead compositioncomprising at least two populations of active ingredient-containingminibeads, wherein members of at least one minibead population areminibeads as described herein (i.e. formulations of the invention inminibead format). It will be understood that the two populations aredifferent.

Such a plural minibead population composition may comprise or consist ofthe following two populations:a first population having a coating that is or comprises a water-solublecellulose ether but having no outer coating, e.g. as described herein;anda second population having a first coating that is or comprises awater-soluble cellulose ether and a second coating that is or comprisesa delayed release coating, for example as described herein e.g. acoating that is or comprises a delayed release polymer.

The respective minibeads of each population of a plural minibeadcomposition may contain the same active ingredient(s) as the minibeadsof some or all of the other populations, or they may contain differentactive ingredient(s) thereto, e.g. a different combination. Thus, allthe minibeads of a multiple minibead population may contain the sameactive ingredient(s), for example they may all contain an activeingredient selected from immunosuppressants (e.g. cyclosporin),hydroxylase inhibitors (e.g. hydralazine) and anti-inflammatories (e.g.mesalazine). More generally, all the minibeads of a multiple minibeadpopulation may contain any identical active ingredient, for exampleselected from those described herein.

A multiple population composition may be for use in treating a disorderof the GI tract, for example as described herein. Such a formulation maybe for use in treating a disorder affecting multiple regions of the GIT,e.g. the upper intestine and the lower intestine, and may comprise anactive ingredient selected from immunosuppressants (e.g. cyclosporin),hydroxylase inhibitors (e.g. hydralazine) and anti-inflammatories (e.g.mesalazine).

The minibeads of a multiple population composition may by way of examplebe contained in a gel capsule or a sachet.

An example of an active ingredient of a formulation of the disclosure iscyclosporin A. Suitably in the embodiment of the preceding paragraph thefirst coating (sub-coating) is applied to a core comprising cyclosporinA. In a particular embodiment the core is or comprises apharmaceutically active ingredient, for example cyclosporin A, in apolymeric matrix, particularly a water-soluble polymer matrix. Stillmore particularly the core comprises a hydrogel-forming polymer matrixand cyclosporin A. Such cores are described in more detail below.Cyclosporin A may be replaced in this example by hydaralazine ormesalazine.

The second coating is outside the first coating and may be any of thedelayed release coatings described herein. In particular, the secondcoating is or comprises a pH independent polymer modified releasecoating described above. For example the second coating may be orcomprise an enteric coating or a pH independent coating. The secondcoating may comprise a mixture of polymers including a polymerdegradable by bacterial or other enzymes. In a particular embodiment thesecond coating comprises ethyl cellulose and optionally a water-solublepolysaccharide, in particular one susceptible to degradation by colonicbacteria, suitably pectin. Accordingly the second coating may comprisethe Surelease-pectin mixture described above. The second coating may beor comprise ethyl cellulose (e.g. Surelease™) and a pore former, whereinthe pore-former is a water-soluble excipient which acts to enhance thepermeability of the coating when placed in an aqueous environment suchas that found in the lower GI tract. Suitable pore formers include thosedescribed above. In embodiments the second coating does not comprise apore former, thus the second coating may not comprise pectin.

Accordingly in one embodiment of the invention there is provided aformulation comprising a core, a first coating and a second coatingoutside the first coating; and wherein:

the core comprises a polymer matrix, in particular a hydrogel-formingpolymer matrix, and a pharmaceutically active ingredient;

the first coating is or comprises a water-soluble cellulose ether,particularly hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose;

the second coating is or comprises a modified release coating or delayedrelease coating, particularly a pH independent modified release coating;

the first coating is present in an amount corresponding to a weight gaindue to the first coating in a range selected from: (i) from 8% to 12%,for example about 10%; (ii) from 4% to 6%, for example about 5%; or(iii) about 6% to about 10%, for example about 7%, about 7.5%, about 8%,about 8.5%, about 9% or about 9.5% by weight based upon the weight ofthe formulation prior to applying the first coating; and wherein

the second coating is present in an amount corresponding to a weightgain of the formulation due to the second coating selected from (a) from10% to 12%, for example about 11% or about 11.5%; (b) from 16% to 18%,for example about 17%; or (c) from about 8% to about 12%, for exampleabout 8.5%, about 9%, about 9.5%, about 10%, about 10.5% or about 11% byweight based upon the weight of the formulation prior to applying thesecond coating.

The first and second coatings in the embodiment of the immediatelypreceding paragraph are suitably any of the first and second coatingsdescribed above or below. Accordingly it is intended that the coatingsdescribed in this section may be applied to any of the formulationsdescribed herein to provide a delayed release coating if required. Thecoatings are particularly useful to provide a modified release coatingto the cores comprising a polymer matrix and pharmaceutically activeingredient described in this application.

The presence of a sub-coating as described in this specification,amongst other things, increases the amount of active ingredient releasedfrom the formulation during dissolution compared to formulations withoutsuch a sub-coating. Accordingly there is provided a delayed releaseformulation comprising a pharmaceutically active ingredient, wherein theformulation comprises a first coating (sub coating) and second coatingas described herein; wherein the first coating is present in an amountto provide a % release of the active ingredient that is higher than a %release of the active ingredient from a corresponding formulationwithout the first coating throughout a time period from 8 hours to 18hours, when measured in the dissolution test described herein. Forexample the sub-coated formulation provides a higher % release in theperiod between 10 hours and 16 hours, suitably between 10 hours and 14hours and more particularly at about 10 hours, about 12, hours about 14hours or about 16 hours in the dissolution test. A sub-coatedformulation of the invention may, for example, provide 2% or higher, 5%or higher or 10% or higher more active ingredient release at a giventime point during the dissolution test compared to the same formulationwithout the subcoating, for example 2 to 15% more active ingredient; theteaching of this paragraph applies in particular to cyclosporin A.

Polymer Matrix Core

The formulation of the invention comprises a core wherein the corecomprises a pharmaceutically active ingredient and a continuous phase ormatrix phase to provide mechanical strength. In embodiments the activeingredient phase is or comprises a disperse phase within the continuousphase or matrix. The continuous phase or matrix phase suitably comprisesa water-soluble polymer matrix and in particular comprises ahydrogel-forming polymer matrix. The core may comprise a polymer matrixwherein the matrix-forming polymer is a hydrogel-forming polymer or acombination thereof.

The active ingredient may be present as a disperse phase within thehydrogel-forming polymer matrix (continuous phase or aqueous phase) ofthe core. The disperse phase may be hydrophobic, in which instance theactive ingredient may be hydrophobic, but may alternatively behydrophilic. For example the disperse phase may comprise a lipid andcyclosporin A or another hydrophobic active. The cores may be preparedby dispersing the active ingredient phase within the aqueous phase toform a colloid and then causing the formulation to solidify (gel),thereby immobilising the active ingredient within the hydrogel-formingpolymer matrix.

The core may have the form of a solid colloid, the colloid comprising acontinuous phase and a disperse phase, wherein the continuous phase isor comprises the hydrogel-forming polymer and the disperse phase is orcomprises a pharmaceutically active ingredient, for example a pluralityof pharmaceutically active ingredients. The disperse phase may comprisea vehicle containing the active ingredient, for example containing it asa solution or a suspension. The vehicle may be hydrophobic, and maycomprise or be a solution of a hydrophobic active ingredient or asuspension of a hydrophilic active ingredient. The disperse phase may byway of example be liquid, semi-solid or solid.

The core may have the characteristics of a dried colloid in which theactive ingredient is dispersed within the hydrogel-forming polymermatrix. Thus, the core may have the form of a dried colloid, the colloidcomprising a continuous phase and a disperse phase, wherein thecontinuous phase is or comprises the hydrogel-forming polymer and thedisperse phase is or comprises a pharmaceutically active ingredient, forexample a plurality of pharmaceutically active ingredients. The dispersephase may comprise a vehicle containing the active ingredient, forexample containing it as a solution or a suspension. The vehicle may behydrophobic, and may comprise or be a solution of a hydrophobic activeingredient or a suspension of a hydrophilic active ingredient. Thedisperse phase may by way of example be liquid, semi-solid or solid. Thedried colloid may be a dried emulsion, i.e. the core may have thecharacteristics of a dried colloid.

Such cores comprising a water-soluble polymer, particularly ahydrogel-forming polymer and a disperse phase comprising cyclosporin Aare described in more detail below.

Delayed Release Coatings

The invention provides formulations having a coating that comprises, oris, a coating-forming polymer, wherein the coating-forming polymer is ahydrogel-forming polymer; the coating may be a first coating outsidewhich is a second coating. The second coating may be a delayed releasecoating, although the invention does not require that the second coatingbe a delayed release coating. The second coating may comprise or be adelayed release polymer.

Thus according to one embodiment of the present invention, there isprovided a pharmaceutical formulation comprising a core, a first coatingand a second coating outside the first coating, wherein the corecomprises a pharmaceutically active ingredient and the first coatingcomprises or is a water-soluble cellulose ether.

The first coating may be present in an amount described elsewhere inthis specification.

The second coating may be present in an amount described elsewhereherein. Suitably the second coating provides a coating thickness on theformulation of from about 10 μm to about 1 mm, for example, from about10 μm to about 500 μm, from about 50 μm to about 1 mm, or about fromabout 50 μm to about 500 μm. The thickness may therefore be from about100 μm to about 1 mm, e.g. 100 μm to about 750 μm or about 100 μm toabout 500 μm. The thickness may be from about 250 μm to about 1 mm, e.g.about 250 μm to about 750 μm or 250 μm to about 500 μm. The thicknessmay be from about 500 μm to about 1 mm, e.g. about 750 μm to about 1 mmor about 500 μm to about 750 μm. The thickness may therefore be fromabout 10 μm to about 100 μm, e.g. from about 10 μm to about 50 μm orabout 50 μm to about 100 μm.

The core is preferably in the form of a minibead, for example asdescribed hereafter in more detail, for example in the form of a solidcolloid. The second coat may be a film or it may be a membrane. Thesecond coat, e.g. film or membrane, may serve to delay release untilafter the stomach; the coat may therefore be an enteric coat. Thedelayed release coat may comprise one or more delayed releasesubstances, preferably of a polymeric nature (e.g. methacrylates etc;polysaccharides etc as described in more detail below), or combinationof more than one such substance, optionally including other excipients,for example, plasticizers. Preferred plasticizers, if they are used,include hydrophilic plasticizers for example triethyl citrate (TEC)which is particularly preferred when using the Eudragit® family ofpolymers as coatings as described below. Another preferred plasticiser,described in more detail below in relation to coating with ethylcellulose, is dibutyl sebacate (DBS). Alternative or additionaloptionally included excipients are glidants. A glidant is a substancethat is added to a powder or other medium to improve its flowability. Atypical glidant is talc which is preferred when using the Eudragit®family of polymers as coatings.

The delayed release coating may be applied as described below and mayvary as to thickness and density. The amount of coat is defined by theadditional weight added to (gained by) the dry formulation (e.g. bead)to which it is applied. Weight gain is preferably in the range 0.1% to50%, preferably from 1% to 15% of the dry weight of the bead, morepreferably in the range 3% to 10% or in the range 5-12% or in the range8-12%.

Polymeric coating material of a delayed release coating may comprisemethacrylic acid co-polymers, ammonio methacrylate co-polymers, ormixtures thereof. Methacrylic acid co-polymers such as, for example,EUDRAGIT™ S and EUDRAGIT™ L (Evonik) are particularly suitable. Thesepolymers are gastroresistant and enterosoluble polymers. Their polymerfilms are insoluble in pure water and diluted acids. They may dissolveat higher pHs, depending on their content of carboxylic acid. EUDRAGIT™S and EUDRAGIT™ L can be used as single components in the polymercoating or in combination in any ratio. By using a combination of thepolymers, the polymeric material can exhibit solubility at a variety ofpH levels, e.g. between the pHs at which EUDRAGIT™ L and EUDRAGIT™ S areseparately soluble. In particular, the coating may be an enteric coatingcomprising one or more co-polymers described in this paragraph. Aparticular coating material to be mentioned is Eudragit L 30 D-55.

The trade mark “EUDRAGIT” is used hereinafter to refer to methacrylicacid copolymers, in particular those sold under the trade mark EUDRAGITby Evonik.

The delayed release coating, where present, can comprise a polymericmaterial comprising a major proportion (e.g., greater than 50% of thetotal polymeric coating content) of at least one pharmaceuticallyacceptable water-soluble polymer, and optionally a minor proportion(e.g., less than 50% of the total polymeric content) of at least onepharmaceutically acceptable water insoluble polymer. Alternatively, themembrane coating can comprise a polymeric material comprising a majorproportion (e.g., greater than 50% of the total polymeric content) of atleast one pharmaceutically acceptable water insoluble polymer, andoptionally a minor proportion (e.g., less than 50% of the totalpolymeric content) of at least one pharmaceutically acceptablewater-soluble polymer.

Ammonio methacrylate co-polymers such as, for example, EUDRAGIT™ RS andEUDRAGIT™ RL (Evonik) are suitable for use in the present invention.These polymers are insoluble in pure water, dilute acids, buffersolutions, and/or digestive fluids over the entire physiological pHrange. The polymers swell in water and digestive fluids independently ofpH. In the swollen state, they are then permeable to water and dissolvedactive agents. The permeability of the polymers depends on the ratio ofethylacrylate (EA), methyl methacrylate (MMA), and trimethylammonioethylmethacrylate chloride (TAMCI) groups in the polymer. For example, thosepolymers having EA:MMA:TAMCI ratios of 1:2:0.2 (EUDRAGIT™ RL) are morepermeable than those with ratios of 1:2:0.1 (EUDRAGIT™ RS). Polymers ofEUDRAGIT™ RL are insoluble polymers of high permeability. Polymers ofEUDRAGIT™ RS are insoluble films of low permeability. Adiffusion-controlled pH-independent polymer in this family is RS 30 Dwhich is a copolymer of ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate and a lowcontent of methacrylic acid ester with quaternary ammonium groupspresent as salts to make the polymer permeable. RS 30 D is available asan aqueous dispersion.

The amino methacrylate co-polymers can be combined in any desired ratio,and the ratio can be modified to modify the rate of drug release. Forexample, a ratio of EUDRAGIT™ RS:EUDRAGIT™ RL of 90:10 can be used.Alternatively, the ratio of EUDRAGIT™ RS:EUDRAGIT™ RL can be about 100:0to about 80:20, or about 100:0 to about 90:10, or any ratio in between.In such formulations, the less permeable polymer EUDRAGIT™ RS generallycomprises the majority of the polymeric material with the more solubleRL, when it dissolves, permitting gaps to be formed through whichsolutes can come into contact with the core allowing for the active toescape in a controlled manner.

The amino methacrylate co-polymers can be combined with the methacrylicacid co-polymers within the polymeric material in order to achieve thedesired delay in the release of the drug and/or portion of the coatingand/or exposure of the formulation within the coating to allow egress ofdrug and/or dissolution of the immobilization or water-soluble polymermatrix. Ratios of ammonio methacrylate co-polymer (e.g., EUDRAGIT™ RS)to methacrylic acid co-polymer in the range of about 99:1 to about 20:80can be used. The two types of polymers can also be combined into thesame polymeric material, or provided as separate coats that are appliedto the beads.

Eudragit™ FS 30 D is an anionic aqueous-based acrylic polymericdispersion consisting of methacrylic acid, methyl acrylate, and methylmethacrylate and is pH sensitive. This polymer contains fewer carboxylgroups and thus dissolves at a higher pH (>6.5). The advantage of such asystem is that it can be easily manufactured on a large scale in areasonable processing time using conventional powder layering andfluidized bed coating techniques. A further example is EUDRAGIT® L30D-55 which is an aqueous dispersion of anionic polymers withmethacrylic acid as a functional group. It is available as a 30% aqueousdispersion.

In addition to the EUDRAGIT™ polymers described above, a number of othersuch copolymers can be used to control drug release. These includemethacrylate ester co-polymers such as, for example, the EUDRAGIT™ NEand EUDRAGIT™ NM ranges. Further information on the EUDRAGIT™ polymerscan be found in “Chemistry and Application Properties ofPolymethacrylate Coating Systems,” in Aqueous Polymeric Coatings forPharmaceutical Dosage Forms, ed. James McGinity, Marcel Dekker Inc., NewYork, pg 109-114 the entirety of which is incorporated herein byreference.

Several derivatives of hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC) also exhibitpH dependent solubility and may be used in the invention for the delayedrelease coating. As examples of such derivatives may be mentioned HPMCesters, for example hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate (HPMCP),which rapidly dissolves in the upper intestinal tract and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate succinate (HPMCAS) in which the presence ofionisable carboxyl groups causes the polymer to solubilize at high pH(>5.5 for the LF grade and >6.8 for the HF grade). These polymers arecommercially available from Shin-Etsu Chemical Co. Ltd. As with otherpolymers described herein as useful for delayed release coatings, HPMCand derivatives (e.g. esters) may be combined with other polymers e.g.EUDRAGIT RL-30 D.

Other polymers may be used to provide a coating in particular enteric,or pH-dependent, polymers. Such polymers can include phthalate,butyrate, succinate, and/or mellitate groups. Such polymers include, butare not limited to, cellulose acetate phthalate, cellulose acetatesuccinate, cellulose hydrogen phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate,hydroxypropyl-methylcellulose phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcelluloseacetate succinate, starch acetate phthalate, amylose acetate phthalate,polyvinyl acetate phthalate, and polyvinyl butyrate phthalate.

pH Independent Polymer Delayed Release Coatings

In a particular embodiment the second coating, where present, is orcomprises a polymeric coating which is pH-independent in its dissolutionprofile and/or in its ability to release the active ingredientincorporated in the formulations of the invention. A pH-independentpolymer delayed release coating comprises a delayed release polymer,optionally a plurality of delayed release polymers, and one or moreother optional components. The other components may serve to modulatethe properties of the formulation. Examples have already been given(e.g., Eudragit RS and RL).

Another example of a pH-independent polymeric coating is a coating thatcomprises or is ethylcellulose; a pH-independent polymeric coating mayhave a delayed release polymer that is ethylcellulose, therefore. Itwill be understood that an ethylcellulose formulation for use in coatinga dosage form may comprise, in addition to ethylcellulose and—in thecase of a liquid formulation—a liquid vehicle, one or more othercomponents. The other components may serve to modulate the properties ofthe formulation, e.g. stability or the physical properties of thecoating such as the flexibility of the film coating. The ethylcellulosemay be the sole delayed release polymer in such a formulation. Theethylcellulose may be in an amount of at least 50%, at least 60%, atleast 70%, at least 80%, at least 90% or at least 95% by weight of thedry weight of a coating formulation for use in coating a dosage form.Accordingly, an ethylcellulose coating may include other components inaddition to the ethylcellulose. The ethylcellulose may be in an amountof at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 70%, at least 80%, at least 90%or at least 95% by weight of the ethylcellulose coating. Consequently,ethylcellulose may be in an amount of at least 50%, at least 60%, atleast 70%, at least 80%, at least 90% or at least 95% by weight of thedry weight of the second coating. Suitably the ethyl cellulose coatingfurther comprises a plasticizer as described below to improve theflexibility of the film and to improve the film-forming properties ofthe coating formulation during application of the coating.

A particular ethylcellulose coating formulation which may be applied tothe first coating is a dispersion of ethylcellulose in a sub-micron tomicron particle size range, e.g. from about 0.1 to 10 μm in size,homogeneously suspended in water with the aid of an emulsificationagent, e.g. ammonium oleate. The ethylcellulose dispersion mayoptionally and preferably contain a plasticizer. Suitably plasticisersinclude for example dibutyl sebacate (DBS), diethylphthalate, triethylcitrate, tributyl citrate, triacetin, or medium chain triglycerides. Theamount of plasticizer present in the coating formulation will varydepending upon the desired properties coating. Typically the plasticizercomprises from 1 to 50%, for example about 8 to about 50% of thecombined weight of the plasticizer and ethyl cellulose. Suchethylcellulose dispersions may, for example, be manufactured accordingto U.S. Pat. No. 4,502,888, which is incorporated herein by reference.One such ethylcellulose dispersion suitable for use in the presentinvention and available commercially is marketed under the trademarkSurelease®, by Colorcon of West Point, Pa. USA. In this marketedproduct, the ethylcellulose particles are, e.g., blended with oleic acidand a plasticizer, then optionally extruded and melted. The moltenplasticized ethylcellulose is then directly emulsified, for example inammoniated water optionally in a high shear mixing device, e.g. underpressure. Ammonium oleate can be formed in situ, for instance tostabilize and form the dispersion of plasticized ethylcelluloseparticles. Additional purified water can then be added to achieve thefinal solids content. See also U.S. Pat. No. 4,123,403, which isincorporated herein by reference.

The trademark “Surelease®” is used hereinafter to refer toethylcellulose coating materials, for example a dispersion ofethylcellulose in a sub-micron to micron particle size range, e.g. fromabout 0.1 to 10 μm in size, homogeneously suspended in water with theaid of an emulsification agent, e.g. ammonium oleate. In particular, thetrademark “Surelease®” is used herein to refer to the product marketedby Colorcon under the Surelease® trademark.

Surelease® dispersion is an example of a combination of film-formingpolymer, plasticizer and stabilizers which may be used as a secondcoating to adjust rates of active principle release with reproducibleprofiles that are relatively insensitive to pH. The principal means ofdrug release is by diffusion through the Surelease® dispersion membraneand is directly controlled by film thickness. Use of Surelease® isparticularly preferred and it is possible to increase or decrease thequantity of Surelease® applied as coating in order to modify thedissolution of the coated formulation. Unless otherwise stipulated, useof the term “Surelease” may apply to Surelease E-7-19020, E-7-19030,E-7-19040 or E-7-19050. An ethylcellulose coating formulation, forexample Surelease E-7-19020, may comprise ethylcellulose blended witholeic acid and dibutyl sebacate, then extruded and melted. The moltenplasticized ethylcellulose is then directly emulsified in ammoniatedwater in a high shear mixing device under pressure. Ammonium oleate isformed in situ to stabilize and form the dispersion of plasticizedethylcellulose particles. Additional purified water is then added toachieve the final solids content. An ethylcellulose coating formulation,for example Surelease E-7-19030, may additionally comprise colloidalanhydrous silica dispersed into the material. An ethylcellulose coatingformulation, for example Surelease E-7-19040, may comprise medium chaintriglycerides instead of dibutyl sebacate, in particular in aformulation comprising colloidal anhydrous silica and oleic acid. Anethylcellulose coating formulation, for example Surelease E-7-19050, mayderive from blending ethylcellulose with oleic acid before melting andextrusion. The molten plasticized ethylcellulose is then directlyemulsified in ammoniated water in a high shear mixing device underpressure. Ammonium oleate is formed in situ to stabilize and form thedispersion of plasticized ethylcellulose particles. However,formulations that comprise medium chain triglycerides, colloidalanhydrous silica and oleic acid are preferred. Surelease E-7-19040 isparticularly preferred.

The invention also contemplates using combinations of ethylcellulose,e.g. a Surelease formulation, with other coating components, for examplesodium alginate, e.g. sodium alginate available under the trade nameNutrateric™

In addition to the EUDRAGIT™ and Surelease® polymers discussed above,where compatible, any combination of coating polymers disclosed hereinmay be blended to provide additional delayed-release profiles.

The delayed release coating can further comprise at least one solubleexcipient to increase the permeability of the polymeric material. Thesesoluble excipients can also be referred to or are pore formers.Suitably, the at least one soluble excipient or pore former is selectedfrom among a soluble polymer, a surfactant, an alkali metal salt, anorganic acid, a sugar, a polysaccharide, and a sugar alcohol. Suchsoluble excipients include, but are not limited to, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyethylene glycol, awater-soluble hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, sodium chloride,surfactants such as, for example, sodium lauryl sulfate andpolysorbates, organic acids such as, for example, acetic acid, adipicacid, citric acid, fumaric acid, glutaric acid, malic acid, succinicacid, and tartaric acid, sugars such as, for example, dextrose,fructose, glucose, lactose, and sucrose, sugar alcohols such as, forexample, lactitol, maltitol, mannitol, sorbitol, and xylitol, xanthangum, dextrins, and maltodextrins; and a polysaccharide susceptible ofdegradation by a bacterial enzyme normally found in the colon, forexample polysaccharides include chondroitin sulphate, pectin, dextran,guar gum and amylase, chitosan etc. and derivatives of any of theforegoing. In some embodiments, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, mannitol, and/orpolyethylene glycol can be used as soluble excipients. The at least onesoluble excipient can be used in an amount ranging from about 0.1% toabout 15% by weight, based on the total dry weight of the polymercoating, for example from about 0.5% to about 10%, about 0.5% to about5%, about 1% to about 3%, suitably about 2% based on the total dryweight of the polymer coating. The delayed release coating may be freefrom HPMC.

The modifications in the rates of release, such as to create a delay orextension in release, can be achieved in any number of ways. Mechanismscan be dependent or independent of local pH in the intestine, and canalso rely on local enzymatic activity to achieve the desired effect.Examples of modified-release formulations are known in the art and aredescribed, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,845,770; 3,916,899;3,536,809; 3,598,123; 4,008,719; 5,674,533; 5,059,595; 5,591,767;5,120,548; 5,073,543; 5,639,476; 5,354,556; and 5,733,566 all of whichare incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

The addition to Surelease™ or other pH-independent polymer substance ofa second polymer (e.g. a polysaccharide, especially aheteropolysaccharide) which is susceptible to degradation by colonicbacterial enzymes (and optionally or alternatively by pancreatic orother relevant enzymes), helps provide targeted release of the activeingredient to a site or sites within the GI tract where the secondpolymer is degraded. By varying the amount of second polymer addedpresent in the coating the dissolution profile may be optimized toprovide the required release of cyclosporin A from the formulation.

In a particular embodiments the delayed release coating provides forrelease of the active agent in at least the colon. Accordingly in oneembodiment the coating comprises a combination of ethylcellulose(preferably a described above, and particularly formulated with anemulsification agent such as, for example, ammonium oleate and/or aplasticizer such as, for example, dibutyl sebacate or medium chaintriglycerides) and a polysaccharide susceptible of degradation by abacterial enzyme normally found in the colon. Such polysaccharidesinclude chondroitin sulphate, pectin, dextran, guar gum and amylase,chitosan etc. and derivatives of any of the foregoing. Chitosan may beused in connection with obtaining a colon-specific release profile;additionally or alternatively, pectin may be so used.

The use of polysaccharides by themselves for delayed release coatingpurposes has been tried with limited success. Most of the non-starchpolysaccharides suffer from the drawback of lacking good film formingproperties. Also, they tend to swell in the GI tract and become porous,resulting in the early release of the drug. Even amorphous amylose,which is resistant to degradation by pancreatic alpha amylase butcapable of degradation by colonic bacterial enzymes, has thedisadvantage of swelling in aqueous media although this can becontrolled by incorporating insoluble polymer, for example ethylcellulose and/or acrylate, into the amylose film. Amylose however is notwater-soluble and although water-insoluble polysaccharides are notexcluded, use of a water-soluble polysaccharide (WSP) susceptible ofbacterial enzymic degradation brings particularly advantageous resultswhen used as a coating in accordance with this embodiment of the presentinvention. A particularly preferred polysaccharide in this embodiment ofthe present invention is pectin. Various kinds of pectin may be usedincluding pectin of different grades available i.e. with differingdegrees of methylation (DM), i.e. percentage of carbonyl groupsesterified with methanol, for example pectins with a DM of more than50%, known as High Methoxy (HM) Pectins or Low Methoxy (LM) pectins, ora pectin combination comprising an HM pectin and an LM pectin. It isalso possible in this embodiment to use pectins having various degreesof acetylation (DAc). Taken together, the DM and DAc or the degree ofsubstitution is known as Degree of Esterification (DE). pectins ofvarious DE's may be used according to the invention. As an alternativeto pectin, sodium alginate may be used as a polysaccharide according toan embodiment of the invention. However, other embodiments mayconveniently include amylose and/or starch which contains amylose.Various grades of starch, containing different percentages of amylosemay be used including for example Hylon V (National Starch FoodInnovation) which has an amylose percentage of 56% or Hylon VII whichhas an amylose percentage of 70%. The remaining percentage isamylopectin. The polysaccharides pectin, amylose and sodium alginate areparticularly preferred for achieving colon delivery of the activeingredient.

It has been found that water-soluble polysaccharide, suitably pectin,can act as a former of pores in the coating otherwise provided byethylcellulose (preferably Surelease). By “pores” is not meantshaft-like holes from the surface to the core of the formulation, ratherareas of weakness or absence of coating occurring stochastically on andwithin the coating of the invention. As mentioned above, pore formationmay also be achieved by inclusion of other soluble excipients within thepolymer coating to increase the permeability of the polymeric material.

Pore formers have been described before in connection with Surelease(see e.g. US 2005/0220878).

According to a particular embodiment of the invention the delayedrelease coating comprises ethylcellulose, e.g. Surelease™, and awater-soluble polysaccharide (WSP) wherein the proportion ofethylcellulose (in particular Surelease™) to WSP is ideally in the range90:10 to 99:1, preferably, 95:5 to 99:1, more preferably 97:3 to 99:1,for example about 98:2 based upon the dry weight of the coating.

Suitably in this embodiment and other embodiments described herein inwhich ethylcellulose (Surelease) is used as a coating, the weight gainof the formulation due to application of the coating comprisingethylcellulose (e.g. Surelease™ and WSP) is in the range of from 1 to30% (for example from: 3% to 25%; 5% to 15%; 8% to 14%; 10% to 12%; 12%to 18%; or 16% to 18%, suitably the weight gain is about 11%, about11.5%, or about 17%). It is particularly preferred that when a WSP isused in this embodiment, the WSP is pectin. Particularly favoured weightgains using coatings comprising ethylcellulose, e.g. Surelease™, arethose in the range 5-12%, 8-12%, 5 to 10%, suitably about 8%, about8.5%, about 9%, about 9.5%, about 10%, about 10.5%, about 11%, about11.5% or about 12%.

Accordingly in an embodiment the second coating comprises ethylcellulose and a water soluble polysaccharide (particularly pectin)wherein the water-soluble polysaccharide (WSP) is present in an amountof 0.1% to about 10% by weight, based on the dry weight of the secondcoating. Suitably the WSP is present in an amount of from about 0.5% toabout 10%, for example about 0.5% to about 5%, about 1% to about 3%,suitably about 2% based on the total dry weight of the second coating.In this embodiment the WSP is preferably pectin. In this embodiment thesecond formulation suitably further comprises a plasticizer. Suitableplasticizers include these described above in relation to Surelease™Suitably the weight gain of the formulation due to application of thesecond coating in this embodiment is in the range of from 1 to 30% (forexample from: 3% to 25%; 5% to 15%; 8% to 14%; 10% to 12%; 12% to 18%;or 16% to 18%, suitably the weight gain is about 11%, about 11.5%, orabout 17%).

In an embodiment the delayed release polymer is not a water-solublecellulose ether. Where the second coating comprises or is a delayedrelease polymer the delayed release polymer may not be the same as thewater-soluble cellulose ether of the first coating. Accordingly thesecond coating may not be the same as the first coating.

Outer Barrier or Protective Coating

The formulations compositions described herein may comprise a protectivecoating outside the second coating. The protective coating may help toprotect the second coating from damage resulting for, for exampleformulating the composition into a final dosage form, or during thehandling, transport or storage of the formulation. The protectivecoating is suitably applied to the outer surface of the formulation. Theprotective coating may be applied directly to the second coating suchthat the protective coating is in contact with the second coating. Theprotective coating is suitably a water soluble coating which does notadversely affect the release of the active ingredient(s) from theformulation when in use. Suitably the protective coating is or comprisesa water-soluble polymer. The protective coating may comprise awater-soluble cellulosic or PVA film-forming polymer. Suitably theprotective coating may be or comprise Opadry (HPMC/HPC-based), Opadry II(PVA/PEG-based) or polyvinyl alcohol-polyethylene glycol graftcopolymers (Kollicoat IR) as described herein. The protective coatingmay be present as a layer of from about 2 to about 50 μm. Suitably theprotective coating is applied to give a weight-gain of from about 0.5 toabout 10%, based upon the weight of the formulation prior to applyingthe protective coating.

Continuous Phase Polymer Matrix (Aqueous Phase)

This section of the specification relating to the polymer matrix recitesamounts of constituents in terms of percent by weight of theformulation. In the context of this section of the specification, whatis meant is percent by weight of the dry weight of the core, i.e.excluding coating(s).

It will be recalled that the core may comprise a matrix or continuousphase and optionally, but not necessarily, also a disperse phase ordiscontinuous phase. Suitably the continuous phase of the core is orcomprises a hydrogel-forming polymer. A hydrogel-forming polymer is apolymer capable of forming a hydrogel. A hydrogel may be described as asolid or semi-solid material, which exhibits no flow when at rest,comprising a network (matrix) of hydrophilic polymer chains that spanthe volume of an aqueous liquid medium.

The core may comprise a hydrogel-forming polymer selected from the groupconsisting of: gelatin; agar; agarose; pectin; carrageenan; chitosan;alginate; starch; xanthan gum; gum Arabic; guar gum; locust bean gum;polyurethane; polyether polyurethane; cellulose; cellulose ester,cellulose acetate, cellulose triacetate; cross-bonded polyvinyl alcohol;polymers and copolymers of acrylic acid, hydroxyalkyl acrylates,hydroxyethyl acrylate, diethylene glycol monoacrylate,2-hydroxypropylacrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl acrylate; polymers andcopolymers of methacrylic acid, hydroxyethyl methacrylate,diethyleneglycol monomethacrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl methacrylate,3-hydroxypropyl methacrylate, dipropylene glycol monomethylacrylate;vinylpyrrolidone; acrylamide polymers and copolymers,N-methylacrylamide, N-propylacrylamide; methacrylamide polymers andcopolymers, N-isopropylmethacrylamide, N-2-hydroxyethylmethacrylamide;and vinyl pyrrolidone; and combinations thereof. In specific embodimentsbinary or tertiary etc combinations of any of the above substances areforeseen.

In a further embodiment the hydrogel-forming polymer is selected fromthe group consisting of gelatin, agar, a polyethylene glycol, starch,casein, chitosan, soya bean protein, safflower protein, alginates,gellan gum, carrageenan, xanthan gum, phthalated gelatin, succinatedgelatin, cellulosephthalate-acetate, oleoresin, polyvinylacetate,polymerisates of acrylic or methacrylic esters andpolyvinylacetate-phthalate and any derivative of any of the foregoing;or a mixture of one or more such a hydrogel-forming polymers

The hydrogel-forming polymer may also be referred to as a hydrocolloidi.e. a colloid system wherein the colloid particles are disperse inwater and the quantity of water available allows for the formation of agel. In embodiments it is preferred to use reversible hydrocolloidspreferably thermo-reversible hydrocolloids (e.g. agar, agarose, gelatinetc) as opposed to irreversible (single-state) hydrocolloids.Thermo-reversible hydrocolloids can exist in a gel and sol state, andalternate between states with the addition or elimination of heat.Gelatin, agar and agarose are thermo-reversible, rehydratable colloidsand are particularly preferred. Gelatin derivatives such as, forexample, succinated or phthalated gelatins are also contemplated.Thermoreversible hydrocolloids which may be used according to theinvention, whether individually or in combination, include those derivedfrom natural sources such as, for example, carrageenan (extracted fromseaweed), gelatin (extracted from bovine, porcine, fish or vegetalsources), agar (from seaweed), agarose (a polysaccharide obtained fromagar) and pectin (extracted from citrus peel, apple and other fruits). Anon-animal based hydrocolloid may be preferred for certain applicationse.g. administration to vegetarians or to individuals not wishing toingest animal products for religious or health reasons. In relation tothe use of carrageenan, reference is made to US patent application2006/0029660 A1 (Fonkwe et al), the entirety of which is incorporatedherein by reference. The hydrogel-forming polymer may comprise or be acombination of gelatin with one or more other thermoreversiblehydrocolloids, e.g. with one or more other of the thermoreversiblehydrocolloids just listed. The hydrogel-forming polymer may comprise orbe a combination of gelatin with agar; optionally, at least one furtherthermoreversible hydrocolloid may be included in the combination, forexample one just listed.

Thermo-reversible colloids present a benefit over other hydrogel-formingpolymers. Gelation or hardening of thermo-reversible colloids occurs bycooling the colloid, e.g. in a liquid cooling bath or by air flow.Gelation of other hydrogel-forming polymers, which is chemically driven,can lead to leakage of the formulation contents into the gelation mediumas the hardening process can take time to occur. Leakage of the contentof the formulation may lead to an inaccurate quantity of the activeingredient within the formulation. Thermo-reversible colloids are alsoknown as thermo-reversible gels, and it is therefore preferred that thehydrogel former be a thermo-reversible gelling agent.

Another term which may be applied to hydrogel formers which areadvantageous is “thermotropic”: a thermotropic gelling agent (which thereader will infer is preferred as a hydrogel former used in theinvention) is one caused to gel by a change in temperature and suchgelling agents are able to gel more rapidly than those whose gelling ischemically induced, e.g. ionotropic gelling agents whose gelling isinduced by ions, for example chitosan. In embodiments of the invention,therefore, the hydrogel former is a thermotropic gel-forming polymer ora combination of such polymers.

The manufacture of the formulation to prepare a core may require thatthe hydrogel-forming polymer be present as a solution, which ispreferably an aqueous solution. The hydrogel-forming polymer representsbetween 5% and 50%, preferably between 10% and 30%, still morepreferably between 15% and 20% by weight of the aqueous phase duringmanufacture as described herein. In addition the hydrogel-formingpolymer may comprise 8 to 35%, (for example 15-25%, preferably 17-18%)hydro-gel forming polymer; 65%-85% (preferably 77-82%) of water plus,optionally, from 1-5% (preferably 1.5 to 3%) sorbitol. When presentsurfactant (e.g. anionic surfactant) in the aqueous phase pre-mix may bepresent in an amount of 0.1 to 5% (preferably 0.5 to 4%) wherein allparts are by weight of the aqueous phase.

In embodiments the formulation comprises at least 25%, suitably at least40% by weight based upon the dry weight of the formulation of thehydrogel-forming polymer. For example the hydrogel-forming polymer ispresent form 25 to 70%, for example 40 to 70% suitably 45 to 60% of theformulation, wherein the % is by weight based upon the dry weight of theformulation.

In embodiments the hydrogel-forming polymer is a pharmaceuticallyacceptable polymer.

In certain embodiments the hydrogel-forming polymer is gelatin. Incertain embodiments the hydrogel-forming polymer comprises gelatin. Incertain embodiments the gelatin comprises at least 40%, for example 40to 70% suitably 45 to 60% of the formulation, wherein the % is by weightbased upon the dry weight of the formulation.

The hydrogel-forming polymer may optionally comprise a plasticiser forexample sorbitol or glycerine, or a combination thereof. In particularone or more plasticisers may be combined with gelatin.

In embodiments in which the hydrogel-forming polymer comprises or isgelatin, reference is hereby made to “Bloom strength”, a measure of thestrength of a gel or gelatin developed in 1925 by O. T. Bloom. The testdetermines the weight (in grams) needed by a probe (normally with adiameter of 0.5 inch) to deflect the surface of the gel 4 mm withoutbreaking it. The result is expressed in Bloom (grades) and usuallyranges between 30 and 300 Bloom. To perform the Bloom test on gelatin, a6.67% gelatin solution is kept for 17-18 hours at 10° C. prior to beingtested.

When the hydrogel-forming polymer comprises or is gelatin the bloomstrength of the gelatin may be in the range of 125 Bloom to 300 Bloom,200 Bloom to 300 Bloom and preferably 250 Bloom to 300 Bloom. It shouldbe appreciated that higher bloom strength gelatin can be replaced bylower bloom strength gelatin at higher concentrations.

According to the invention, in embodiments in which the hydrogel-formingpolymer matrix comprises or is gelatin, the gelatin may be sourced by avariety of means. For example, it can be obtained by the partialhydrolysis of collagenous material, such as the skin, white connectivetissues, or bones of animals. Type A gelatin is derived mainly fromporcine skins by acid processing, and exhibits an isoelectric pointbetween pH 7 and pH 9, while Type B gelatin is derived from alkalineprocessing of bones and animal (bovine) skins and exhibits anisoelectric point between pH 4.7 and pH 5.2. Type A gelatin is somewhatpreferred. Gelatin for use in the invention may also be derived from theskin of cold water fish. Blends of Type A and Type B gelatins can beused in the invention to obtain a gelatin with the requisite viscosityand bloom strength characteristics for bead manufacture.

Lower temperature gelatin (or gelatin derivatives or mixtures ofgelatins with melting point reducers) or other polymer matrices able tobe solidified at lower temperatures (e.g. sodium alginate) may also beused. It is therefore believed that polymer which comprises or is lowtemperature gelatin is a preferred matrix polymer.

According to the invention, in embodiments in which the polymercomprises or is gelatin, the starting gelatin material is preferablymodified before manufacture to produce “soft gelatin” by the addition ofa plasticizer or softener to the gelatin to adjust the hardness of theformulation of the invention. The addition of plasticizer achievesenhanced softness and flexibility as may be desirable to optimisedissolution and/or further processing such as, for example, coating.Useful plasticizers of the present invention for combination withgelatin or another hydrogel-forming polymer include glycerine(1,2,3-propanetriol), D-sorbitol (D-glucitol), sorbitol BP (anon-crystallizing sorbitol solution) or an aqueous solution ofD-sorbitol, sorbitans (e.g. Andidriborb 85/70), mannitol, maltitol, gumarabic, triethyl citrate, tri-n-butyl citrate, dibutylsebacate. Other orsimilar low molecular weight polyols are also contemplated for exampleethylene glycol and propylene glycol. Polyethylene glycol andpolypropylene glycol may also be used although these are less preferred.Glycerine and D-sorbitol may be obtained from the Sigma ChemicalCompany, St. Louis, Mo. USA or Roquette, France. Some active agents andexcipients included for other functions may act as plasticisers.

Softeners or plasticisers, if utilized, can be ideally incorporated in aproportion rising to 30%, preferably up to 20% and more preferably up to10% by dry weight of the formulation of the invention, even morepreferably between 3 and 8%, and most preferably between 4% and 6%.

Although not essential, the hydrogel-forming polymer matrix may alsooptionally contain a disintegrant where it is particularly desired toenhance the rate of disintegration of the formulation of the invention.Examples of disintegrants which may be included are alginic acid,croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, low-substituted hydroxypropylcellulose and sodium starch glycolate.

A crystallisation inhibitor (e.g. approximately 1% by dry weight of theformulation) may also be included in the formulation of the invention.An example is hydroxy propyl/methyl cellulose (HPC or HPMC, hypromelloseetc) which may play other roles such as, for example, emulsifier.

In another embodiment, the hydrogel-forming polymer matrix is chitosanwhich can exist in the form of biogels with or without additives asdescribed e.g. in U.S. Pat. No. 4,659,700 (Johnson & Johnson); by KumarMajeti N.V. Ravi in Reactive and Functional Polymers, 46, 1, 2000; andby Paul et al. in ST. P. Pharma Science, 10, 5, 2000 the entirety of all3 of which is incorporated herein by reference. Chitosan derivativese.g. thiolated entities are also contemplated.

The hydrogel-forming polymer matrix may be a non-hydrocolloid gum.Examples are the cross-linked salts of alginic acid. For example,aqueous solutions of sodium alginate gums extracted from the walls ofbrown algae have the well known property of gelling when exposed to di-and trivalent cations. A typical divalent cation is calcium, often inthe form of aqueous calcium chloride solution. It is preferred in thisembodiment that the cross-linking or gelling have arisen throughreaction with such a multivalent cation, particularly calcium.

The hydrogel-forming polymer matrix may have a low water content,therefore the formulation may have a low water content. As describedbelow, during manufacture of a core the disperse phase, optionallycomprising an active ingredient, is mixed with an aqueous solution ofthe hydrogel-forming polymer and the formulation is gelled, for exampleto provide cores which are minibeads. Suitably the cores are driedfollowing formation to reduce the water content present in the core.

In certain embodiments the formulation does not comprise compoundscontaining a disulphide bond. In embodiments the hydrogel-formingpolymer does not comprise compounds containing a disulphide bond.

The hydrogel-forming polymer matrix forming the continuous phase of thecore (aqueous phase) may further comprise a surfactant. Surfactantswhich may be used in the formulation are described in the section“surfactants” below.

Surfactant which may be present in the continuous aqueous phase of thecore include, for example a surfactant selected from the groupconsisting of: cationic; amphoteric (zwitterionic); anionic surfactants,for example perfluoro-octanoate (PFOA or PFO), perfluoro-octanesulfonate(PFOS), sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), ammonium lauryl sulfate, and otheralkyl sulfate salts, sodium laureth sulfate, also known as sodium laurylether sulfate (SLES) and alkyl benzene sulphonate; and non-ionicsurfactants for example perfluorocarbons, polyoxyethyleneglycol dodecylether (e.g. Brij such as, for example, Brij 35), Myrj (e.g. Myrj 49, 52or 59), Tween 20 or 80 (also known as Polysorbate) (Brij, Myrj and Tweenproducts are available commercially from Croda), poloxamers which arenonionic triblock copolymers composed of a central hydrophobic chain ofpolyoxypropylene (poly(propylene oxide)) flanked by two hydrophilicchains of polyoxyethylene (poly(ethylene oxide)), or a combination ofthe foregoing. In particular, the surfactant may be selected from, orcomprise, anionic surfactants and combinations thereof, the anionicsurfactants optionally being those mentioned in this paragraph. Aparticular class of surfactant comprises sulfate salts. A preferredanionic surfactant in the aqueous phase is SDS. Mixtures of anionicsurfactants may be used. Mixtures of further surfactants are alsocontemplated, e.g. mixtures comprising perfluorocarbons.

In embodiments of the invention, the core comprises a hydrophilicsurfactant which, without being bound by theory, is believed at leastpartially to partition the aqueous phase (polymer matrix).

Such surfactants intended for such inclusion in the aqueous phase of thecore are preferably readily diffusing or diffusible surfactants tofacilitate manufacturing and processing of the formulation of theinvention.

The surfactant may have an HLB of at least 10 and optionally of at least15, e.g. at least 20, or at least 30 and optionally of 38-42, e.g. 40.Such surfactants can be of any particular type (ionic, non-ionic,zwitterionic) and may comprise as a proportion of dry weight of theformulation from 0.1% to 6%, e.g. 0.1% to 5%. 0.1% to 4% or 0.1% to 3%,more preferably in a proportion of at least 1% and in particular between1.0 and 4.5 or 5%, ideally within or just outside the 2-4% range, forexample from 2 to 3% or approximately 2% or approximately 4%.

Unless otherwise stated or required, all percentages and ratios are byweight.

In one embodiment the anionic surfactant may be an anionic surfactantselected from alkyl sulphates, carboxylates or phospholipids, orcombinations thereof.

The physical form of the surfactant at the point of introduction intothe aqueous phase during preparation of the core plays a role in theease of manufacture of the core. As such, although liquid surfactantscan be employed, it is preferred to utilize a surfactant which is insolid form (e.g. crystalline, granules or powder) at room temperature,particularly when the aqueous phase comprises gelatin.

In general, mixtures of surfactants can be utilised e.g. to achieveoptimum long term stability of the formulation of the invention withshorter chain surfactants in general facilitating shorter term stability(an aid to processing) and longer chain surfactants facilitating longerterm stability (an aid to shelf life). In some embodiments, shorterchain surfactants have up to C₁₀ alkyl (e.g. C₆-C₁₀ alkyl) as thehydrophobic portion of the surfactant whilst longer chain surfactantshave C₁₀ or higher alkyl (e.g. C₁₀-C₂₂ alkyl) as the hydrophobic portionof the surfactant. It is envisaged that C₁₀ alkyl surfactants mayfacilitate processing or facilitate prolongation of shelf life, or both,depending on the identity of the other excipients and of the activeprinciple(s). Higher alkyl may in particular implementations of theinvention be C₁₁-C₂₂ or C₁₂-C₂₂ alkyl, and in some embodiments has alength of no greater than C₁₈.

The matrix phase may comprise pharmaceutically active agent in solutionin the matrix phase. Such active agents in solution in the matrix phaseare therefore not present as a separate phase but are part of thecontinuous matrix phase. Active agents suitable to be in solution in thematrix phase are those which are soluble in the aqueous premix which,during manufacture, is used to form the matrix phase. Additionally oralternatively, a pharmaceutically active agent may be comprised in adisperse phase.

Disperse Phase

The polymer matrix of the core described above (for example ahydrogel-forming polymer) may comprise a disperse phase. Suitably thedisperse phase, where present, may comprise a pharmaceutically activeagent, in particular a hydrophobic active agent. The invention alsoincludes formulations in which the disperse phase comprises ahydrophilic pharmaceutically active agent. In embodiments, therefore,the disperse phase comprises cyclosporin A or another hydrophobicactive. In such embodiments the hydrophobic active is preferably solublein the disperse phase, i.e. the disperse phase comprises a vehicle inwhich the active is dissolved. Embodiments wherein the hydrophobicactive is soluble in the disperse phase are preferred, because suchformulations release the cyclosporin in a solubilised form, which mayenhance the therapeutic effect of the drug at the site of release, forexample by enhancing absorption into the colonic mucosa.

In embodiments a pharmaceutically active agent is or is comprised in thedisperse phase.

The disperse phase may comprise a water immiscible phase (also referredto herein asan oil phase). The water immiscible phase may be solid,semi-solid or liquid at ambient temperature (e.g. 25° C.), and thereforethe oil phase may for example be waxy at ambient temperature. The oilphase may be or may comprise a liquid lipid and optionally a solventmiscible therewith. A pharmaceutically active ingredient may be presentin the oil phase. Suitably the active ingredient is soluble in the oilphase.

The disperse phase may comprise a combination of oils. The liquid lipidmay be a short-, medium- or long-chain triglyceride formulation, or acombination thereof. A medium chain triglyceride(s) (MCT) comprises oneor more triglycerides of at least one fatty acid selected from C₆, C₇,C₈, C₉, C₁₀, C₁₁ and C₁₂ fatty acids. It will be understood thatcommercially available triglyceride, in particular MCT, formulationsuseful in the invention are mixtures derived from natural products andusually or always contain minor amounts of compounds which are not MCTs;the term “medium chain triglyceride formulation” is therefore to beinterpreted to include such formulations. A short chain triglyceride(s)comprises one or more triglycerides of at least one short chain fattyacid selected from C₂-C₅ fatty acids. A long chain triglyceride(s)comprises one or more triglycerides of at least one long chain fattyacid having at least 13 carbon atoms.

The liquid lipid may comprise or be triglycerides and/or diglycerides.Such glycerides may be selected from medium chain glycerides or shortchain triglycerides or a combination thereof.

The liquid lipid may be a caprylic/capric triglyceride, i.e. acaprylic/capric triglyceride formulation (which it will be understoodmay contain minor amounts of compounds which are not caprylic/caprictriglycerides).

Said solvent which is optionally included in an oil phase may bemiscible with both the liquid lipid and with water. Examples of suitablesolvents are 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol available commercially undertrade names Carbitol™, Carbitol cellosolve, Transcutol™, Dioxitol™,Poly-solv DE™, and Dowanal DE™; or the purer Transcutol™ HP (99.9).Transcutol P or HP, which are available commercially from Gattefosse,are preferred. Another possible co-solvent is poly(ethylene glycol).PEGs of molecular weight 190-210 (e.g. PEG 200) or 380-420 (e.g. PEG400) are preferred in this embodiment. Suitable PEGs can be obtainedcommercially under the name “Carbowax” manufactured by Union CarbideCorporation although many alternative manufacturers or suppliers arepossible.

The disperse phase may represent from 10-85% by dry weight of the core.

As discussed above the disperse phase may be an oil phase comprising anypharmaceutically suitable oil, e.g. a liquid lipid. The oil phase may bepresent as oil drops. In terms of dry weight of the core, the oil phasemay comprise a proportion from 10% to 85%, e.g. 15% to 50%, for example20% to 30% or from 35% to 45%. The term “oil” means any substance thatis wholly or partially liquid at ambient temperature or close-to-ambienttemperature e.g. between 10° C. and 40° C. or between 15° C. and 35° C.,and which is hydrophobic but soluble in at least one organic solvent.Oils include vegetable oils (e.g. neem oil) and petrochemical oils.

Oils which may be included in the oil phase include poly-unsaturatedfatty acids such as, for example, omega-3 oils for exampleeicosapentanoic acid (EPA), docosohexaenoic acid (DHA), alpha-linoleicacid (ALA), conjugated linoleic acid (CLA). Preferably ultrapure EPA,DHA or ALA or CLA are used e.g. purity up to or above 98%. Omega oilsmay be sourced e.g. from any appropriate plant e.g. sacha inchi. Suchoils may be used singly e.g. EPA or DHA or ALA or CLA or in anycombination. Combinations of such components including binary, tertiaryetc combinations in any ratio are also contemplated e.g. a binarymixture of EPA and DHA in a ratio of 1:5 available commercially underthe trade name Epax 6000. The oil part of the oil phase may comprise orbe an oil mentioned in this paragraph.

Oils which may be included in the oil phase are particularly naturaltriglyceride-based oils which include olive oil, sesame oil, coconutoil, palm kernel oil, neem oil. The oil may be or may comprise saturatedcoconut and palm kernel oil-derived caprylic and capric fatty acids andglycerin e.g. as supplied under the trade name Miglyol™ a range of whichare available and from which one or more components of the oil phase ofthe invention may be selected including Miglyol™ 810, 812(caprylic/capric triglyceride); Miglyol™ 818: (caprylic/capric/linoleictriglyceride); Miglyol™ 829: (caprylic/capric/succinic triglyceride;Miglyol™ 840: (propylene glycol dicaprylate/dicaprate). Note thatMiglyol™ 810/812 are MCT formulations which differ only in C₈/C₁₀-ratioand because of its low C₁₀-content, the viscosity and cloud point ofMiglyol™ 810 are lower. The Miglyol™ range is available commerciallyfrom Sasol Industries. As noted above, oils which may be included in theoil phase need not necessarily be liquid or fully liquid at roomtemperature. Waxy-type oils are also possible: these are liquid atmanufacturing temperatures but solid or semi-solid at normal ambienttemperatures. The oil part of the oil phase may comprise or be an oilmentioned in this paragraph.

Alternative or additional oils which may be included in the oil phaseaccording to the invention are other medium chain triglycerideformulations such as for example Labrafac™ Lipophile manufactured byGattefosse in particular product number WL1349. Miglyol™ 810, 812 arealso medium chain triglyceride formulations.

Accordingly the oil phase may be or comprise medium chain mono-di- ortri-glycerides.

The medium chain glyceride(s) (e.g. mono- di- or tri-glyceride(s))mentioned herein are those which comprise one or more triglycerides ofat least one fatty acid selected from fatty acids having 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,11 or 12 carbon atoms, e.g. C₈-C₁₀ fatty acids.

The oil phase may further comprise one or more surfactants as describedbelow under the section “surfactants”. For example the oil phase maycomprise one or more non-ionic or amphoteric surfactants. Particularlythe oil phase may comprise one or more non-ionic surfactants listedunder “surfactants” below. The presence of a surfactant in the oil phasemay also provide enhanced solubilisation of an active ingredientcontained in it (i.e. act as a solubiliser) and/or may provide enhancedemulsification when the disperse phase is mixed with the aqueous polymerphase during preparation of the core (i.e. act as an emulsifier).

Surfactant in the oil phase may for example be or comprisepolyethoxylated castor oils (polyethylene glycol ethers) which can beprepared by reacting ethylene oxide with castor oil. Commercialpreparations may also be used as a surfactant/solubilizer e.g. thosecommercial preparations which contain minor components such as, forexample, polyethyelene glycol esters of ricinoleic acid, polyethyeleneglycols and polyethyelene glycol ethers of glycerol. A preferred exampleis Kolliphor EL, previously known as Cremophor EL. Another surfactantwhich may be present in the oil phase is for example a phospholipid.

In embodiments the surfactant in the oil phase may be or comprise anon-ionic surfactant selected from sorbitan-based surfactants, PEG-fattyacids, glyceryl fatty acids, or poloxamers.

Within embodiments, the HLB of the oil may be in the range 0-10(optionally 1-8, e.g. 1-6 and sometimes 1-5).

In another embodiment the oil phase comprises an oil with an HLB in therange range 0-10 (preferably 1-5) and a surfactant (suitably a non-ionicsurfactant) with an HLB in the range 10-20 and optionally 11-20(preferably 11-15) range 0-10 (preferably 1-5).

In another embodiment the oil phase comprises an oil and a surfactant(suitably a non-ionic surfactant) wherein the oil and the surfactantboth have an HLB in the range range 0-10. For example the oil has an HLBof 1-5, for example 1 to 4 or 1-2 and the surfactant has an HLB 2-8, forexample 3-7, 2-6, or 3-4).

Suitable oils with a low HLB (HLB less than 10) include medium chaintriglycerides, linoleoyl macrogolglycerides (polyoxylglycerides),caprylocaproyl macrogolglycerides and caprylic/capric triglyceride. Interms of commercial products, particularly preferred oils in the lowerHLB range are Labrafac™ Lipophile (e.g. 1349 WL), Captex 355 and Miglyol810.

One example of a surfactant with high HLB which may be used in a low HLBoil includes polyethoxylated castor oils (polyethylene glycol ethers),for example the commercial product Kolliphor EL.

In an embodiment the oil phase comprises of a surfactant of high HLB andan oil of low HLB in a ratio of 1-4:1 by weight, e.g. 1.2-3.0:1 byweight, preferably 1.5-2.5:1 by weight and most preferably 1.8-2.2:1 byweight (high HLB: low HLB) advantageously stabilizes the emulsion beforeand after immobilization of the oil droplets in the aqueous phase. Inthis context “stabilize” means in particular that the embodimentimproves dissolution and/or dispersion of the formulation in vitro. Inthis embodiment “high” HLB is generally intended above 10, preferablyfrom 10-14, more preferably between 12 and 13. By “low” HLB is generallyintended below 10, preferably in the range 1 to 4, more preferably 1 to2.

It is to be understood that the oil phase in the embodiments above mayfurther comprise or more solvents, for example 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanolor low molecular weight PEG as mentioned above.

A particular oil phase comprises an oil (low HLB), a high HLB non-ionicsurfactant and a co-solvent. For example the following three commercialproducts: Transcutol P (as co-solvent), Myglyol 810 (as oil) andKolliphor EL (surfactant). Miglyol has a low HLB and Kolliphor EL has ahigh HLB. An oil phase may therefore comprise or consist of acombination of the following and optionally a pharmaceutically activeingredient: 2-ethoxyethanol, an MCT and particularly a caprylic/caprictriglyceride formulation, and a polyethoxylated castor oil.

A hydrophobic active ingredient is preferably soluble in the oil phase.As discussed below in relation to preparation of the core, thehydrophobic active ingredient is suitably dissolved in the oil phase andthe oil phase in mixed with an aqueous phase comprising thehydrogel-forming polymer.

The disperse phase (oil phase) may be or comprise a glycerideformulation, optionally wherein the disperse phase is or comprises afatty acid monoglyceride, diglyceride or triglyceride or a combinationthereof, or the disperse phase is or comprises a caprylic/caprictriglyceride formulation.

The disperse phase of the colloidal core may comprise self-assemblystructures, for example micelles, vesicles, liposomes or nanoparticles,or at least the structures which result from drying aqueous colloids ofsuch types (have the characteristics of structures which result fromdrying aqueous colloids of such types). The invention in particularincludes formulations in which the disperse phase is micellar, i.e.formed of micelles and/or promicelles. The term “promicelle” refers to apart of a formulation which will form a micelle upon contact with water,e.g. gastrointestinal contents.

The following discussion for convenience refers to micelles but isapplicable in general to other self-assembly structures. Amicelle-forming surfactant is present as micelles dispersed within thehydrogel-forming polymer in a “wet” (not yet dried) composition made asan intermediate in the manufacturing process described herein. It isbelieved also to be present as micelles in the dried composition butobservability of micelles or micelle-like structures in the driedcomposition is not a requirement of the invention. It is mentioned atthis point that the presence of a surfactant in micelle form does notrequire that the entire surfactant content of a composition is inmicelle form as it is considered more probable that a portion of thesurfactant will be outside the micelles. Thus in the “wet” composition,whether the hydrogel-forming polymer is in the gel state or the sol(liquid) state may comprise the micelle-forming surfactant at aconcentration above the critical micelle concentration.

The diameter of the dispersed micelles may be between 0.5 nm and 200 nm,1 nm and 50 nm, or 5 nm and 25 nm. The size of the micelles may bedetermined by dynamic light scattering or diffusion NMR techniques knownwithin the art. Although the size of the micelles is given as a diameterthis does not imply that the micelles must be purely spherical speciesonly that they may possess some approximately circular dimension.

The surfactant may be a non-ionic surfactant. The surfactant may be apolyoxyethylated surfactant. The surfactant has a hydrophilic head whichmay be a hydrophilic chain, for example a polyoxyethylene chain or apolyhydroxylated chain.

The surfactant of course has a hydrophobic part and in particular ahydrophobic chain. The hydrophobic chain may be a hydrocarbon chain, forexample having at least 6 carbon atoms and optionally at least 10 carbonatoms, and particularly of at least 12 carbon atoms; some hydrocarbonchains have no more than 22 carbon atoms, for example C₁₀-C₂₀, C₁₂-C₂₀or C₁₅-C₂₀ hydrocarbon chains. It may be an alkyl chain, e.g. having anumber of carbon atoms just mentioned. It may be an alkenyl chaincomprising one or more carbon-carbon double bonds, e.g. having a numberof carbon atoms just mentioned. The surfactant may comprise ahydrocarbon chain, e.g. alkyl chain or alkenyl chain, that issubstituted provided that it maintains a hydrophobic characteristic.There may for example be one or two substituents, for example a singlesubstituent, e.g. selected from halogen (e.g. F or Cl), hydroxy, thioloxo, nitro, cyano; hydroxy or thiol substituents may be esterified byfor example a fatty acid. One class of surfactants comprise ahydrocarbon monosubstituted by hydroxy; optionally, at least a portionof the hydroxy groups of an aliquot of surfactant, e.g. of thesurfactant in a bead, may be esterified by a fatty acid or mono-hydroxyfatty acid as disclosed herein or etherified by a fatty alcohol forexample having at least 6 carbon atoms and optionally at least 10 carbonatoms, and particularly of at least 12 carbon atoms; some hydrocarbonchains have no more than 22 carbon atoms, for example C₁₀-C₂₀, C₁₂-C₂₀or C₁₅-C₂₀ fatty alcohols.

The hydrophobic chain may be part of an esterified fatty acid R¹—COOH orof an etherified or esterified fatty ether R¹—COH where R′ is thehydrophobic chain, e.g. as mentioned in the preceding paragraph. Theester-forming or, as the case may be, ether-forming group will typicallycomprise a hydrophilic chain.

As mentioned, the surfactant may have a hydrophilic chain and may be anon-ionic surfactant, and may satisfy both requirements. The hydrophilicchain may be a poly(ethyleneglycol), also known as poly(oxyethylene) ormacrogol. The hydrophilic chain may be of the formula—(O—CH₂—CH₂)_(n)—OR where n is 5 or 6 to 50 and R is H or alkyl, e.g.ethyl or methyl. The invention includes implementations in which n isfrom 6 to 40, e.g. from 6 to 35. In some embodiments, n is from 6 to 25and optionally is from 8 to 25 or from 8 to 15. In other embodiments, nis from 8 to 50 or from 8 to 40, e.g. is from 10 to 50, 10 to 40 or 10to 35. In a particular embodiment, n is 15. For all hydrophilic chainsof the formula —(O—CH₂—CH₂)_(n)—OR, in one class of embodiments R is H.

The hydrophilic chain may be a polyhydroxylated chain (for example aC₅-C₂₀ e.g. C₅-C₁₀ chain), e.g. having a hydroxy group on the carbonatoms of the chain, for example a glucamide.

The micelle-forming surfactant may comprise a combination of ahydrophobic chain as described above and a hydrophilic chain asdescribed above. It may therefore be, or comprise, a macrogol ester of afatty acid as described herein or a macrogol ether of a fatty alcohol asdescribed herein.

Micelle-forming surfactants comprising a hydrophobic chain and ahydrophilic chain can be selected from the group consisting of: macrogolesters; macrogol ethers; diblock copolymers; triblock copolymers; andamphiphilic polymers. In certain embodiments of the invention anycombinations of the group are included within the invention.

Examples of macrogol esters which are suitable for use in the presentinvention are macrogol esters of fatty acids having at least 6 carbonatoms and optionally at least 10 carbon atoms, and particularly of atleast 12 carbon atoms; some fatty acids have no more than 22 carbonatoms, for example C₁₀-C₂₀, C₁₂-C₂₀ or C₁₅-C₂₀ fatty acids. The fattyacids may be saturated or unsaturated but are in particular saturated.To be mentioned are macrogol 25 cetostearyl ether (Cremophor® A25);macrogol 6 cetostearyl ether (Cremophor® A6); macrogol glycerolricinoleate 35 (Cremophor® EL); macrogol-glycerol hydroxystearate 40(Cremophor® RH 40); macrogol-15-hydroxystearate (Solutol® HS 15).Examples of macrogol ethers which are suitable for use in the presentinvention are macrogol ethers of fatty alcohols having at least 6 carbonatoms and optionally at least 10 carbon atoms, and particularly of atleast 12 carbon atoms; some fatty alcohols have no more than 22 carbonatoms, for example C₁₀-C₂₀, C₁₂-C₂₀ or C₁₅-C₂₀ fatty alcohols. The fattyalcohols may be saturate or unsaturated but are in one embodimentsaturated.

Examples of amphiphilic polymers which are suitable for use in thepresent invention are: alkyl glucamides; fatty alcohol poly(ethoxyl)atesalso known as polyethoxylated alkyl ethers; poly(ethoxyl)ated fatty acidesters (Myrj or Solutol); fatty amide polyethoxylate; fatty amineethoxylate; alkylphenol ethoxylate; polyethoxylated sorbitan esters(polysorbates); polyethoxylated glycerides; or poly-glycerol esters.

Examples of copolymers, which are suitable for use in the presentinvention are: pluronics (poloxamers);polyvinylpyrollidone-polyvinylacetate (Plasdone S630); aminoalkylmethacrylate copolymer (Eudragit EPO); methacrylic acid—methylmethacrylate copolymer (Eudragit S100, L100); polycaprolactone-PEG;polycaprolactone-methoxy—PEG; poly(aspartic acid)-PEG;poly(benzyl-L-glutamate)-PEG; poly(D,L-lactide)methoxy-PEG;poly(benzyl-L-aspartate-PEG; or poly(L-lysine)-PEG

In a preferred embodiment the micelle-forming surfactant cis a macrogolester, more preferably a macrogol ester that conforms to the EuropeanPharmacopoeia monograph number 2052 macrogol-15-hydroxystearate, such asKolliphor® HS 15 marketed by BASF.

Kolliphor® HS 15 consists of polyglycol mono- and di-esters of12-hydroxystearic acid and about 30% of free polyethylene glycol. Themain components of the ester part have the following chemicalstructures:

where x and y are integers and a small part of the 12-hydroxy group canbe etherified with polyethylene glycol.

Suitable surfactants comprise those which during manufacture combinewith the aqueous phase (including hydrogel-forming polymer) in an amountabove their CMC to form a clear liquid. Kolliphor® HS 15 is such asurfactant.

In certain embodiments the weight ratio of the micelle-formingsurfactant to the antigen is from 10:1 to 100:1, optionally from 50:1 to100:1. In some embodiments, the ratio is from 80:1 to 90:1. Inparticular embodiments, the ratio is from 50:1 to 60:1.

In particular embodiments, the compositions of the invention comprise acombination of micelle-forming compounds. Such a combination ofmicelle-forming compounds may consist of two or more surfactants asmentioned in the preceding section of this specification. Alternatively,a surfactant may be combined with one or more other compounds at leastpotentially able to form micelles with the surfactant, optionallyselected from cationic lipids and glycolipids, amongst others. As anadditional option, a composition may comprise a plurality of surfactantsas mentioned in the preceding section of this specification and one ormore other compounds at least potentially able to form micelles with thesurfactant, optionally selected from cationic lipids and glycolipids,amongst others.

The invention therefore includes compositions as described herein whichcomprise:

two or more micelle-forming surfactants, e.g. two or more surfactantshaving a hydrophobic chain and a hydrophilic chain;

a compound, e.g. a single compound or two or more compounds, selectedfrom cationic lipids and glycolipids;

two or more micelle-forming surfactants and a compound, e.g. a singlecompound or two or more compounds, selected from cationic lipids andglycolipids.

A disperse phase which is or comprises a surfactant may enhance theabsorption of an active ingredient, for example cyclosporin A, into thetissue of the GIT, for example by forming self-assembly structures, suchas micelles, which are associated with the active ingredient and thuspresent the drug to the mucosa tissue of the GI tract in a form whichenhances uptake/absorption in the tissue.

The oil phase may also include one or more volatile or non-volatilesolvents, which may be the same or different from the solvent orco-solvent previously mentioned. Such solvents may for example remain inthe formulation of the invention following processing e.g. initialdissolution of the components present in the core, and have noparticular function in the core formulation. Alternatively, suchsolvents if present may function to maintain the cyclosporin a dissolvedstate (in solution) within the oil phase or to facilitate dispersion,egress etc. In other embodiments, the solvent may have partly or fullyevaporated during processing and therefore be present in only minorquantities if at all. In a related embodiment, the solvent, particularlywhen a solvent which is both oil and water-soluble is used, may bepartly or completely present in the aqueous phase of the core. Anexample of such a solvent is ethanol. Another example is transcutolwhich is already mentioned as a co-solvent.

Accordingly, the core may comprise a hydrogel-forming polymer matrixwhich forms a continuous phase and a disperse phase comprising an activeingredient, particularly a hydrophobic active ingredient, a high HLBnon-ionic surfactant compound, a low HLB oil, and optionally aco-solvent. Optionally, the active ingredient may be a hydrophobicactive ingredient.

The core may comprise a continuous phase which is or comprises ahydrogel-forming polymer and a disperse phase which is or comprises anactive ingredient, optionally a hydrophobic active ingredient e.g.cyclosporin, and an oil phase, the oil phase comprising an oil and oneor more surfactants, wherein the oil and the surfactant have an HLB ofup to 10. The presence of a surfactant with an HLB of up to 10 has beenfound to provide advantageous effects during the manufacture of thecomposition by for example inhibiting crystallisation of cyclosporinfrom the oil phase when the disperse phase is mixed with the continuousphase to form a colloid, for example an oil in water emulsion. Suchcompositions form a further aspect of the invention.

The presence of a surfactant with an HLB of up to 10 in the oil phasemay enhance the rate and or extent of release of an active ingredient,optionally a hydrophobic active ingredient e.g. cyclosporin from thecomposition following oral administration. The presence of thesurfactant may act to maintain a high proportion of the an activeingredient, optionally a hydrophobic active ingredient e.g. cyclosporinin a solubilised form after it has been released from the compositioninto an aqueous medium such as that found in the lower GI tract,particularly the colon.

The core may have the form of a solid colloid, the colloid comprising acontinuous phase being or comprising a hydrogel forming polymer and adisperse phase being or comprising an active ingredient, optionally ahydrophobic active ingredient e.g. cyclosporin, and an oil phase, theoil phase comprising an oil and one or more surfactants, wherein thesurfactant has an HLB of up to 10, for example an HLB in the range 1-10.The pharmaceutical formulation is suitably a modified releasecomposition. However, the core may be used to provide an instant releasecomposition by, for example using the core without a modified releasecoating.

The HLB value of the surfactant present in the oil phase may be may beup to 8, up to 7, 1-8, 1-7, 1-5, 2-5, 1-4, 1-3, 1-2, 2-4, 3-4, 5-8, 6-8or 6-7, for example the HLB value may be about 1, about 2, about 3,about 4, about 5, about 6 or about 7. The surfactant may be anysurfactant having an HLB value with the ranges described above, forexample any of the surfactants described herein under the section“surfactants” herein or elsewhere in the description and examples. Thesurfactant is suitably a non-ionic surfactant. The cyclosporin may besoluble in the surfactant, for example the cyclosporin may have asolubility of more than about 200 mg/g in the surfactant. Thus, thesurfactant may have a cyclosporin solubility of more than about 200mg/g, optionally more than about 250 mg/g. The surfactant may have acyclosporin solubility of from about 200 mg/g to about 500 mg/g,optionally from about 250 mg/g to about 500 mg/g, about 200 mg/g toabout 400 mg/g, from about 225 mg/g to about 375 mg/g, from about 250mg/g to about 375 mg/g, from about 200 mg/g to about 300 mg/g, fromabout 300 mg/g to about 400 mg/g, from about 250 mg/g to about 350 mg/g,from about 225 mg/g to about 275 mg/g, from about 350 mg/g to about 400mg/g. Preferably, the surfactant has a cyclosporin solubility of fromabout 200 mg/g to about 400 mg/g or from about 225 mg/g to about 375mg/g. Solubility of cyclosporin in a surfactant may be carried outfollowing the protocol described in Development of a SelfMicro-Emulsifying Tablet of Cyclosporine-A by the Liquisolid CompactTechnique, Zhao et al (International Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciencesand Research, 2011, Vol. 2(9), 2299-2308) which is incorporated hereinby reference.

The surfactant may have an HLB of up to 6 and a cyclosporin solubilityof from 200 mg/g to 400 mg/g. The surfactant may have an HLB value of2-6 (optionally 3-6) and a cyclosporin solubility of from about 200 mg/gto about 400 mg/g. The surfactant may have an HLB value of 2-6(optionally 3-6) and a cyclosporin solubility of from about 250 mg/g toabout 400 mg/g. The surfactant may have an HLB value of 2-6 (optionally3-6) and a cyclosporin solubility of from about 225 mg/g to about 275mg/g. The surfactant may have an HLB value of 2-6 (optionally 3-6) and acyclosporin solubility of from about 250 mg/g to about 350 mg/g.

The surfactant may be or comprise a surfactant selected from: fatty acidglycerides, polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters, propylene glycolfatty acid esters, fatty acid lactic acid ester, sucrose fatty acidesters, sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyethylene glycol fatty alcoholethers, ethylene oxide-propylene oxide block co-polymers andpolyoxyethylene ethers; wherein the surfactant has an HLB value of up to10, up to 8, or particularly a HLB value described above for example 1to 8, or 1 to 4.

The surfactant may be or comprise a surfactant selected from: fatty acidglycerides, polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters, propylene glycolfatty acid esters, fatty acid lactic acid esters or sucrose fatty acidesters, wherein the surfactant has an HLB value of up to 10, up to 8, orparticularly a HLB value described above for example 1 to 8 or 1 to 4.

The surfactant may be or comprise a fatty acid glyceride, wherein thesurfactant has an HLB value of up to 10, up to 8, or particularly a HLBvalue described above, for example 1 to 8 or 1 to 4.

The surfactant may be or comprise a sorbitan fatty acid ester, forexample a sorbitan mono, di- or tri-fatty acid ester and wherein thesurfactant has an HLB value described above, for example 1 to 8 or 1 to4. The fatty acid may be or comprise for example one or more C₁₀-C₂₀,C₁₂-C₂₀ or C₁₅-C₂₀ fatty acids. The fatty acids may be saturated orunsaturated. A particular surfactant is or comprises sorbitan trioleate(commercially available as Span 85), Another particular surfactant is orcomprises sorbitan monopalmitate (commercially available as Span 40).

The surfactant may be or comprise polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters,suitably esters with for example one or more C₁₀-C₂₀, C₁₂-C₂₀ or C₁₅-C₂₀fatty acid, which acid may be saturated or unsaturated. Suitably thesurfactant is or comprises a mixture comprising polyethylene glycolfatty acid esters and fatty acid glycerides, wherein the fatty acid is aC₁₅-C₂₀ fatty acid, which may be saturated or unsaturated.

The surfactant may be or comprise a polyglycerised fatty acid forexample polyglyceryl dioleate. Accordingly the surfactant may act as anemulsifierand may be polyglyceryl-3 dioleate (for example products soldunder the trade mark Plurol® Oleique

The weight ratio of surfactant having a HLB value of up to 10:oil may befrom about 5:1 to about 1:5, from about 3:1 to about 1:2, from about 3:1to about 1:1 or from about 2.5:1 to 1.5:1. Suitably the weight ratio maybe about 1:1, about 2:1, about 2.5:1, about 3:1, about 1:1.5 or about1:2.

The surfactant having a HLB value of up to 10 may be present in thecomposition in an amount of from about 5% to about 20%, from about 8% toabout 15%, or from about 10% to about 14% by weight based upon the dryweight of the core. It is to be understood that reference to the “dryweight of the core” means the weight of the components present in theuncoated core other than water.

The oil may be any of the oils described herein, particularly the oilsdescribed in the section “Disperse Phase”. The oil may be or comprise ashort-, medium- or long-chain triglyceride composition, or a combinationthereof. A medium chain triglyceride(s) (MCT) comprises one or moretriglycerides of at least one fatty acid selected from C₆, C₇, C₈, C₉,C₁₀, C₁₁ and C₁₂ fatty acids. A particular oil phase is, or comprises atriglyceride based oil, such as those commercially available asMiglyol™, for example Miglyol™ 810, 812 (caprylic/capric triglyceride);Miglyol™ 818: (caprylic/capric/linoleic triglyceride); Miglyol™ 829:(caprylic/capric/succinic triglyceride).

The oil may be present in the pharmaceutical formulation in an amount offrom about 2% to about 25%, from about 3% to about 20%, from about 3% toabout 10% or from about 5% to about 10% by weight based upon the dryweight of the core.

The oil phase may also comprise a solvent. Suitable solvents are asdescribed herein in relation to the disperse phase and are suitablemiscible with both the oil and water. The solvent may be presently inthe composition in an amount of form about 1% to 30%, for about 5% toabout 30%, for about 10% to about 25%, or from about 12% to about 22% byweight based upon the dry weight of the core. A particular solvent is2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol (available commercially as for exampleTranscutol™ P or HP).

The hydrogel-forming polymer may be or comprise one or more of thehydrogel-forming polymers described herein, particularly those describedunder “Continuous Phase Polymer Matrix”. Suitably the hydrogel-formingpolymer is or comprises a hydrogel-forming polymer selected from thegroup consisting of gelatin, agar, a polyethylene glycol, starch,casein, chitosan, soya bean protein, safflower protein, alginates,gellan gum, carrageenan, xanthan gum, phthalated gelatin, succinatedgelatin, cellulosephthalate-acetate, oleoresin, polyvinylacetate,hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, polymerisates of acrylic or methacrylicesters and polyvinylacetate-phthalate and any derivative of any of theforegoing; or a mixture of one or more such a hydrogel forming polymers.A particular hydrogel-forming polymer is selected from carrageenan,gelatin, agar and pectin, or a combination thereof, particularly gelatinand/or agar, more particularly gelatin. The hydrogel forming polymer issuitably present in the core in a gelled state such that the polymerforms a solid matrix within which the disperse phase is dispersed toprovide for example a solid colloid. The hydrogel-forming polymer ispreferably sufficiently gelled to provide a core which is sufficientlyrigid to enable to be handled and further processed into a dosage formor to be coated with for example a modified release coating as describedherein.

The hydrogel-forming polymer may be present in an amount of from about20% to about 70%, about 20% to about 55%, about 25% to about 50%, about30% to about 50%, or about 40% to about 45% by weight based upon the dryweight of the core.

The continuous phase may comprise a suitably plasticiser, particularlywhen the hydrogel-forming polymer is or comprises gelatin. A particularplasticiser is Sorbitol. When present the plasticiser may be present atfor example up to about 20% or up to about 10%, suitably from about 3%to about 8%, or from about 4% to about 6% by weight based upon the dryweight of the core.

The continuous phase may comprise a surfactant. The surfactant presentin the continuous phase is preferably different to the surfactantpresent in the oil phase. Suitable surfactants which may be present inthe continuous phase are as described herein under the section“Continuous Phase Polymer Matrix”. Accordingly particular surfactantswhich may be present in the continuous phase may be cationic, amphoteric(zwitterionic) or anionic surfactants. Suitably the surfactant presentin the continuous phase is or comprises an anionic surfactant, moreparticularly a hydrophilic anionic surfactant. The surfactant in thecontinuous phase may be or comprise at least one surfactant selectedfrom fatty acid salts, alkyl sulfates and bile salts, particularly analkyl sulfate, for example a C₁₀-C₂₂ alkyl sulphate suitably sodiumdodecyl sulphate. The surfactant present in the continuous phase,particularly anionic surfactant is present in the composition in anamount of from 0.1% to 6%, e.g. 0.1% to 5%. 0.1% to 4%, 0.1% to 3%, 1%to 4%, 1.5% to 4.5%, or 2.5% to 4.5% preferably in an amount 2-4% byweight based upon the dry weight of the core.

The cyclosporin A is suitably present in the composition in an amountfor from about 5% to about 20%, from about 8% to about 15%, or fromabout 9% to about 14% % by weight based upon the dry weight of the core.

In a particular embodiment there is provided a pharmaceuticalformulation comprising a core having the form of a solid colloid, thecolloid comprising a continuous phase being or comprising a hydrogelforming polymer and a disperse phase;

wherein the disperse phase is or comprises:cyclosporin A;an oil being or comprising: a short-, medium- or long-chain triglyceridecomposition, or a combination thereof, for example a caprylic/caprictriglyceride, a caprylic/capric/linoleic triglyceride; and acaprylic/capric/succinic triglyceride;one or more non-ionic surfactants with an value HLB of up to 10, up to8, up to 7, 1-8, 1-7, 1-5, 2-5, 1-4, 1-3, 1-2, 2-4, 3-4, 5-8, 6-8 or6-7, for example about 1, about 2, about 3, about 4, about 5, about 6 orabout 7; optionally wherein the surfactant is or comprises a fatty acidglyceride, a sorbitan fatty acid ester, or a polyethylene glycol fattyacid ester;andoptionally a solvent, wherein the solvent is miscible with the oil andwith water, for example 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol;wherein the continuous phase is or comprises:

-   -   a hydrogel-forming polymer, for example a hydrogel forming        polymer being or comprising carrageenan, gelatin, agar and        pectin, or a combination thereof, optionally gelatin or agar or        a combination thereof, more optionally the polymer of the a        hydrogel forming polymer matrix is or comprises gelatin;    -   an anionic surfactant, optionally an anionic surfactant is        selected from fatty acid salts, alkyl sulphates and bile salts,        particularly an alkyl sulfate, for example a C₁₀-C₂₂ alkyl        sulphate suitably, sodium dodecyl sulphate; and    -   optionally a plasticiser, for example sorbitol.

In another embodiment there is provided a pharmaceutical formulationcomprising a core having the form of a solid colloid, the colloidcomprising a continuous phase being or comprising a hydrogel formingpolymer and a disperse phase;

wherein the disperse phase is or comprises:

-   -   from about 8% to about 15% cyclosporin A;    -   from about 2% to about 20%, for example about 3% to about 10% of        oil being or comprising a caprylic/capric triglyceride, a        caprylic/capric/linoleic triglyceride; and a        caprylic/capric/succinic triglyceride, preferably a        caprylic/capric triglyceride;    -   one or more non-ionic surfactants with an value HLB of up to 10,        up to 8, up to 7, 1-8, 1-7, 1-5, 2-5, 1-4, 1-3, 1-2, 2-4, 3-4,        5-8, 6-8 or 6-7, for example about 1, about 2, about 3, about 4,        about 5, about 6 or about 7; optionally wherein the surfactant        is or comprises a fatty acid glyceride, a sorbitan fatty acid        ester, or a polyethylene glycol fatty acid ester, optionally        wherein the non-ionic surfactant is present in an amount of from        about 8% to about 15%; and    -   optionally from about 12% to about 22% solvent, wherein the        solvent is miscible with the oil and with water, for example        2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol;        wherein the continuous phase is or comprises:    -   from about 30% to about 70%, for example about 30% to about 50%        hydrogel-forming polymer, optionally wherein the hydrogel        forming polymer is or comprises carrageenan, gelatin, agar and        pectin, or a combination thereof, optionally gelatin or agar or        a combination thereof, more optionally wherein the hydrogel        forming polymer matrix is or comprises gelatin;    -   an anionic surfactant, optionally an anionic surfactant is        selected from fatty acid salts, alkyl sulphates and bile salts,        particularly an alkyl sulfate, for example a C₁₀-C₂₂ alkyl        sulphate suitably sodium dodecyl sulphate, optionally wherein        the anionic surfactant is present in an amount of from about        0.1% to about 5%, suitably from 2% to 4%; and    -   optionally up to about 10% plasticiser, for example sorbitol;        wherein all % are % by weight based upon the dry weight of the        core.

In another embodiment there is provided an orally administered modifiedrelease composition comprising a core having the form of a solidcolloid, the colloid comprising a continuous phase being or comprising ahydrogel forming polymer and a disperse phase;

wherein the disperse phase is or comprises:

-   -   from about 8% to about 15% cyclosporin A;    -   from about 3% to about 10% of oil being or comprising a        caprylic/capric triglyceride;    -   one or more non-ionic surfactants with an value HLB of up to 7,        for example 1-7, or 2-4 wherein the surfactant is or comprises a        fatty acid glyceride, a sorbitan fatty acid ester, or a        polyethylene glycol fatty acid ester, optionally wherein the        non-ionic surfactant is present in an amount of from about 8% to        about 15%; and    -   optionally from about 12% to about 22% solvent, wherein the        solvent is miscible with the oil and with water, for example        2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol;        wherein the continuous phase is or comprises:    -   from about 30% to about 50% hydrogel-forming polymer selected        from gelatin or agar or a combination thereof, optionally        wherein the hydrogel forming polymer matrix is or comprises        gelatin;    -   0.1% to about 5%, suitably from 2% to 4% anionic surfactant for        example sodium dodecyl sulphate; and    -   optionally up to about 10% plasticiser, for example sorbitol;        wherein all % are % by weight based upon the dry weight of the        core.

In a particular embodiment the core is in the form of a solid colloid,the colloid comprising a continuous phase and a disperse phase, whereinthe continuous phase comprises the hydrogel-forming polymer; wherein

the disperse phase is or comprises:

-   -   a pharmaceutically active ingredient, for example cyclosporin A        or another hydrophobic active ingredient;    -   a medium chain mono-, di- and/or tri-glyceride, for example a        medium chain triglyceride, particularly caprylic/capric        triglyceride;    -   a polyethoxylated castor oil; and    -   a co-solvent (for example 2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol);        and wherein the continuous phase is or comprises:    -   a hydrogel-forming polymer matrix which is or comprises a        hydrocolloid selected from carrageenan, gelatin, agar and        pectin, or a combination thereof optionally selected from        gelatin and agar or a combination thereof, more particularly the        polymer of the a hydrogel-forming polymer matrix is or comprises        gelatin;    -   a plasticiser, optionally a plasticiser selected from glycerin,        a polyol for example sorbitol, polyethylene glycol and triethyl        citrate or a mixture thereof, particularly sorbitol; and    -   an anionic surfactant, for example at least one surfactant        selected from fatty acid salts, alkyl sulphates and bile salts,        particularly an alkyl sulphate, for example sodium dodecyl        sulphate.

In a further specific embodiment the core comprises a hydrogel-formingpolymer matrix comprising gelatin in an amount of 300 to 700 mg/g, thecore further comprising an active ingredient, medium chain mono-, di-and/or tri-glycerides (for example medium chain triglyceride,particularly caprylic/capric triglyceride) in an amount of 20 to 200mg/g, and the core further comprises the following components:

-   -   co-solvent (for example 2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol) in an amount of        150 to 250 mg/g;    -   non-ionic surfactant in an amount of 80 to 200 mg/g; and    -   anionic surfactant in an amount of 15 to 50 mg/g,        wherein weights are based upon the dry weight of the core.

Suitably in the embodiment of the immediately preceding paragraph theactive ingredient is cyclosporin and the cyclosporin A may be present inan amount of 60 to 180 mg/g, for example of 60 to 150 mg/g, 80 to 120mg/g or particularly 80 to 100 mg/g. The non-ionic and anionicsurfactants are as defined herein, for example an anionic surfactantselected from alkyl sulphates, carboxylates or phospholipids(particularly SDS); or a non-ionic surfactant selected fromsorbitan-based surfactants, PEG-fatty acids, or glyceryl fatty acids orpoloxamers. A particular non-ionic surfactant is a polyethoxylatedcastor oil (for example Cremophore EL).

The cores described above comprising hydrogel-forming polymer matrix anda pharmaceutically active ingredient, particularly cyclosporin A, arecoated as described herein to provide a formulation according to theinvention. A particular coating for these embodiments is a coatingcomprising

-   -   a first coating (sub-coating) which is or comprises a        water-soluble cellulose ether, particularly hydroxypropylmethyl        cellulose;    -   a second coating outside the first coating which is or comprises        a modified release coating, particularly a pH independent        modified release coating, more especially a coating comprising        ethyl cellulose (e.g. Surelease) still more particularly a        coating comprising ethyl cellulose and a water-soluble        polysaccharide such as pectin (e.g. a Surelease-pectin coating        as described herein); and wherein    -   the first coating is present in an amount corresponding to a        weight gain due to the first coating in a range selected        from: (i) from 8% to 12%, for example about 10%; or (ii) from 4%        to 6%, for example about 5% by weight based upon the weight of        the formulation prior to applying the first coating; and wherein    -   the second coating is present in an amount corresponding to a        weight gain of the formulation due to the second coating        selected from (a) from 10% to 12%, for example about 11% or        about 11.5%; or (b) from 16% to 18%, for example about 17% by        weight based upon the weight of the formulation prior to        applying the second coating.

The disperse phase may comprise particles of an active ingredientdispersed in the matrix. The particles may be microparticles (e.g. 1-999μm size) or nanoparticles (e.g. 1-999 nm size.) In particular,therefore, the disperse phase may comprise a particulate hydrophobicdrug dispersed within the matrix.

Surfactant

The formulation may contain one or more surfactants, for examplesurfactants may be present in the core (including in thehydrogel-forming polymer matrix, and in the disperse phase or both).Surfactants may also be present in one or more of the coatings appliedto the core.

Suitable surfactants can be anionic, cationic, zwitterionic, ornon-ionic. In the description and claims of this specification, the term“surfactant” is employed as a contraction for “surface active agent”.For the purposes of this description and claims, it is assumed thatthere are four major classifications of surfactants; therefore thesurfactant may be: anionic, cationic, non-ionic, and amphoteric(zwitterionic). The non-ionic surfactant remains whole, has no charge inaqueous solutions, and does not dissociate into positive and negativeions. Anionic surfactants are water-soluble, have a negative charge anddissociate into positive and negative ions when placed in water. Thenegative charge lowers the surface tension of water and acts as thesurface-active agent. Cationic surfactants have a positive charge, andalso dissociate into positive and negative ions when placed in water. Inthis case, the positive ions lower the surface tension of the water andact as the surfactant. The amphoteric (zwitterionic) surfactant assumesa positive charge in acidic solutions and performs as a cationicsurfactant, or it assumes a negative charge in an alkaline solution andacts as an anionic surfactant.

The surfactant(s) may be selected from: anionic surfactants andcombinations thereof; from non-ionic surfactants and combinationsthereof; and from combination of an anionic surfactant (e.g. a singlesuch surfactant or a plurality thereof) and a non-ionic surfactant (e.g.a single such surfactant or a plurality thereof).

Surfactants can also be classified according to theirhydrophilic-lipophilic balance (HLB) which is a measure of the degree towhich the surfactant is hydrophilic or lipophilic, determined bycalculating values for the different regions of the molecule, asdescribed (originally for non-ionic surfactants) by Griffin in 1949 and1954 and later by Davies. The methods apply a formula to the molecularweight of the whole molecule and of the hydrophilic and lipophilicportions to give an arbitrary (semi-empirical) scale up to 40 althoughthe usual range is between 0 and 20. An HLB value of 0 corresponds to acompletely hydrophobic molecule, and a value of 20 would correspond to amolecule made up completely of hydrophilic components. The HLB value canbe used to predict the surfactant properties of a molecule:

HLB Value Expected properties    0 to 3 antifoaming agent from 4 to 6W/O emulsifier from 7 to 9 wetting agent  from 8 to 18 an O/W emulsifierfrom 13 to 15 typical of detergents    10 to 18 solubiliser orhydrotrope

Although HLB numbers are assigned to surfactants other than thenon-ionic, for which the system was invented, HLB numbers for anionic,cationic, non-ionic, and amphoteric (zwitterionic) surfactants can haveless significance and often represent a relative or comparative numberand not the result of a mathematical calculation. This is why it ispossible to have surfactants above the “maximum” of 20. HLB numbers canhowever be useful to describe the HLB requirement of a desiredapplication for a given emulsion system in order to achieve goodperformance.

Non-Ionic Surfactants

The surfactant may be or comprise at least one surfactant selected fromthe following non-ionic surfactants.

PEG-fatty acid monoester surfactants, PEG-fatty acid diestersurfactants, PEG-fatty acid monoester and diester surfactant mixtures,PEG glycerol fatty acid esters, transesterified products of oils andalcohols, lower alcohol fatty acid esters, polyglycerised fatty acids,propylene glycol fatty acid esters, mono and diglyceride surfactants,sterol and sterol derivative surfactants, PEG-sorbitan fatty acidesters, sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyethylene glycol alkyl ethers,sugar ester surfactants, polyethylene glycol alkyl phenol surfactants,POE-POP block copolymers, fatty acid salts, bile salts, phospholipids,phosphoric acid esters, carboxylates, acyl lactylates, sulphates andsulfonates, and cationic surfactants.

A PEG-fatty acid mono ester surfactant for example PEG 4-100monolaurate, PEG 4-100 monooleate, PEG 4-100 monostearate, PEG-laurate,PEG-oleate, PEG stearate, and PEG ricinoleate. A PEG-fatty acid diestersurfactant for example PEG dilaurate; PEG dioleate, PEG distearate, PEGdipalmitate. A mixture of PEG-fatty acid mono- and diesters.

A PEG glycerol fatty acid ester for example PEG glyceryl laurate, PEGglyceryl stearate, PEG glyceryl oleate.

PEG-sorbitan fatty acid esters for example PEG sorbitan laurate, PEGsorbitan monolaurate, PEG sorbitan monopalmitate, PEG sorbitanmonostearate, PEG sorbitan tristearate, PEG sorbitan tetrastearate, PEGsorbitan monooleate, PEG sorbitan oleate, PEG sorbitan trioleate, PEGsorbitan tetraoleate, PEG sorbitan monoisostearate, PEG sorbitolhexaoleate, PEG sorbitol hexastearate.

Propylene glycol fatty acid esters for example propylene glycolmonocaprylate, propylene glycol monolaurate, propylene glycol oleate,propylene glycol myristate, propylene glycol monostearate, propyleneglycol hydroxy stearate, propylene glycol ricinoleate, propylene glycolisostearate, propylene glycol monooleate, propylene glycoldicaprylate/dicaprate, propylene glycol dioctanoate, propylene glyconcaprylate/caprate, propylene glycol dilaurate, propylene glycoldistearate, propylene glycol dicaprylate, propylene glycol dicaprate.

A sorbitan fatty acid ester for example sorbitan monolaurate, sorbitanmonopalmitate, sorbitan monooleate, sorbitan monostearate, sorbitantrioleate, sorbitan sesquioleate, sorbitan tristearate, sorbitanmonoisostearate, sorbitan sesquistearate.

Lower alcohol fatty acid esters for example ethyl oleate, isopropymyristate, isopropyl palmitate, ethyl linoleate, isopropyl linoleate.

Polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block copolymers for example poloxamer105, poloxamer 108, poloxamer 122, poloxamer 123, poloxamer 124,poloxamer 181, poloxamer 182, poloxamer 183, poloxamer 184, poloxamer185, poloxamer 188, poloxamer 212, poloxamer 215, poloxamer 217,poloxamer 231, poloxamer 234, poloxamer 235, poloxamer 237, poloxamer238, poloxamer 282, poloxamer 284, poloxamer 288, poloxamer 331,poloxamer 333, poloxamer 334, poloxamer 335, poloxamer 338, poloxamer401, poloxamer 402, poloxamer 403, poloxamer 407.

Polyglycerised fatty acids for example polyglyceryl stearate,polyglyceryl oleate, polyglyceryl isostearate, polyglyceryl laurate,polyglyceryl ricinoleate, polyglyceryl linoleate, polyglycerylpentaoleate, polyglyceryl dioleate, polyglyceryl distearate,polyglyceryl trioleate, polyglyceryl septaoleate, polyglyceryltetraoleate, polyglyceryl decaisostearate, polyglyceryl decaoleate,polyglyceryl monooleate, dioleate, polyglyceryl polyricinoleate.

PEG alkyl ethers for example PEG oleyl ether, PEG lauryl ether, PEGcetyl ether, PEG stearyl ether.

PEG alkyl phenols for example PEG nonyl phenol, PEG octyl phenol ether.

Transesterification products of alcohol or polyalcohol with natural orhydrogenated oils for example PEG castor oil, PEG hydrogenated castoroil, PEG corn oil, PEG almond oil, PEG apricot kernel oil, PEG oliveoil, PEG-6 peanut oil, PEG hydrogenated palm kernel oil, PEG palm kerneloil, PEG triolein, PEG corn glycerides, PEG almond glycerides, PEGtrioleate, PEG caprylic/capric triglyceride, lauroyl macrogol glyceride,stearoyl macrogol glyceride, mono, di, tri, tetra esters of vegetableoils and sorbitol, pentaerythrityl tetraisostearate, pentaerythrityldistearate, pentaerythrityl tetraoleate, pentaerythrityl tetrastearate,pentaerythrityl tetracaprylate/tetracaprate, pentaerythrityltetraoctanoate.

Oil-soluble vitamins for example vitamins A, D, E, K, and isomers,analogues, and derivatives thereof. The derivatives include, forexample, organic acid esters of these oil-soluble vitamin substances,for example the esters of vitamin E or vitamin A with succinic acid.Derivatives of these vitamins include tocopheryl PEG-1000 succinate(Vitamin E TPGS) and other tocopheryl PEG succinate derivatives withvarious molecular weights of the PEG moiety, for example PEG 100-8000.

Sterols or sterol derivatives (e.g. esterified or etherified sterols asfor example PEGylated sterols) for example cholesterol, sitosterol,lanosterol, PEG cholesterol ether, PEG cholestanol, phytosterol, PEGphytosterol.

Sugar esters for example sucrose distearate, sucrosedistearate/monostearate, sucrose dipalmitate, sucrose monostearate,sucrose monopalmitate, sucrose monolaurate, alkyl glucoside, alkylmaltoside, alkyl maltotrioside, alkyl glycosides, derivatives and othersugar types: glucamides.

Carboxylates (in particular carboxylate esters) for example ethercarboxylates, succinylated monoglycerides, sodium stearyl fumarate,stearoyl propylene glycol hydrogen succinated, mono/diacetylatedtartaric acid esters of mono- and diglycerides, citric acid esters ofmono-, diglycerides, glyceryl-lacto esters of fatty acids; acyllactylates: lactylic esters of fatty acids, calcium/sodiumstearoyl-2-lactylate calcium/sodium stearoyl lactylate, alginate salts,propylene glycol alginate.

A fatty acid monoglyceride, diglyceride or triglyceride or a combinationthereof.

Anionic Surfactants

Anionic surfactants may be selected from following anionic surfactants.

Fatty acid salts and bile salts for example sodium caproate, sodiumcaprylate, sodium caprate, sodium laurate, sodium myristate, sodiummyristolate, sodium palmitate, sodium palmitoleate, sodium oleate,sodium ricinoleate, sodium linoleate, sodium linolenate, sodiumstearate, sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium tetradecyl sulfate, sodiumlauryl sarcosinate, sodium dioctyl sulfosuccinate; sodium cholate,sodium taurocholate, sodium glycocholate, sodium deoxycholate, sodiumtaurodeoxycholate, sodium glycodeoxycholate, sodium ursodeoxycholate,sodium chenodeoxycholate, sodium taurochenodeoxycholate, sodium glycochenodeoxycholate, sodium cholylsarcosinate, sodium N-methyltaurocholate

Phospholipids for example egg/soy lecithin, cardiolipin, sphingomyelin,phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidyl ethanolamine, phosphatidic acid,phosphatidyl glycerol, phosphatidyl serine.

Phosphoric acid esters having the general formula RO—PO₃ ⁻M⁺ where the Rgroup is an ester forming group, e.g. an alkyl, alkenyl or aryl groupoptionally substituted by a PEG moiety through which the alkyl, alkenylor aryl group is coupled to the phosphate moiety. R may be a residue ofa long chain (e.g. >C9) alcohol or a phenol. Specific examples includediethanolammonium polyoxyethylene-10 oleyl ether phosphate,esterification products of fatty alcohols or fatty alcohol ethoxylateswith phosphoric acid or anhydride.

Sulfates and sulfonates (in particular esters thereof) for exampleethoxylated alkyl sulfates, alkyl benzene sulfones, α-olefin sulfonates,acyl isethionates, acyl taurates, alkly glyceryl ether sulfonates, octylsulfosuccinate disodium, disodium undecylenamideo-MEA-sulfosuccinate,alkyl phosphates and alkyl ether phosphates.

Cationic Surfactants

Cationic surfactants may be selected from the following cationicsurfactants.

Hexadecyl triammonium bromide, dodecyl ammonium chloride, alkylbenzyldimethylammonium salts, diisobutyl phenoxyethoxydimethylbenzylammonium salts, alkylpyridinium salts; betains (trialkylglycine):lauryl betaine (N-lauryl,N,N-dimethylglycine); ethoxylated amines:polyoxyethylene-15 coconut amine, alkyl-amines/diamines/quaternatyamines and alkyl ester.

Emulsifiers

The surfactant may act as an emulsifier such surfactants includenon-ionic emulsifiers, for example selected from: a mixture oftriceteareth-4 phosphate, ethylene glycol palmitostearate and diethyleneglycol palmitostearate (for example sold under the trade mark SEDFOS™75); sorbitan esters, e.g. sorbitan monooleate, sorbitan monolaurate,sorbitan monpalmitate, sorbitan monostearate (for example products soldunder the trade mark Span®), PEG-8 beeswax e.g. sold under the trademark Apifil®; a mixture of cetyl alcohol, ceteth-20 and steareth-20 (forexample Emulcire™ 61 WL 2659); a mixture of glyceryl monostearate EP/NFand PEG-75 palmitostearate (for example Gelto™ 64); a mixture of PEG-6stearate and PEG-32 stearate (for example Tefose® 1500); a mixture ofPEG-6 palmitostearate, ethylene glycol palmitostearate, and PEG-32palmitostearate (e.g. Tefose® 63); triglycerol diisostearate (forexample products sold under the trade mark Plurol)Diisostearique®;polyglyceryl-3 dioleate (for example products sold under the trade markPlurol® Oleique).

Other Excipients

The formulation optionally contains one or more of the followingadditional substances or categories of substances. For example, theformulation may contain a protectant such as, for example, a proteolyticenzyme inhibitor or a protector against acid degradation or both (e.g.an alkali for example sodium hydroxide); an adhesive entity such as, forexample, a muco- or bio-adhesive; excipients to maximize solubility ofthe active ingredient; excipients to maximize permeability of the activeingredient in the GIT. Typical excipients for enhancing the permeabilityof the epithelial barrier include but are not limited to sodium caprate,sodium dodecanoate, sodium palmitate, SNAC, chitosan and derivativesthereof, fatty acids, fatty acid esters, polyethers, bile salts,phospholipids, alkyl polyglucosides, hydroxylase inhibitors,antioxidants (e.g. ascorbic acid) and/or nitric oxide donors. Thepreceding list is of particular interest to enhance permeability in theileum.

To enhance permeability in the colon, typical excipients include, butnot limited to sodium caprate, sodium dodecanoate, sodium palmitate,SNAC, chitosan and derivatives thereof, fatty acids, fatty acid esters,polyethers, bile salts, phospholipids, alkyl polyglucosides, hydroxylaseinhibitors, antioxidants and/or nitric oxide donors, including nitricoxide donor groups covalently attached to various pharmaceuticallyactive ingredients.

The formulation may further comprise excipients to enhance thetherapeutic potential of an active ingredient, for example cyclosporin Aor another immunosuppressant, in the ileum and colon including, but notlimited to absorption limiters, essential oils such as, for example,omega 3 oils, natural plant extracts such as, for example, neem,ion-exchange resins, bacteria degradable conjugation linkers such as,for example, azo bonds, polysaccharides such as, for example, amylose,guar gum, pectin, chitosan, inulin, cyclodextrins, chondroitin sulphate,dextrans, guar gum and locust bean gum, nuclear factor kappa Binhibitors, acids such as, for example, fumaric acid, citric acid andothers, as well as modifications thereof.

The formulation may further comprise excipients to reduce systemic sideeffects associated with absorption of certain active, for examplecyclosporin or other immunosuppressants, in the GIT, such as the smallintestine, including, but not limited to, antioxidants, such as, forexample, curcuminoids, flavanoids or more specifically includingcurcumin, beta-carotene, α-tocopherol, ascorbate or lazaroid.

The formulation may further or separately comprise antioxidants (suchas, for example, ascorbic acid or BHT—butyl hydroxy toluene)taste-masking or photosensitive components or photoprotectivecomponents. Antioxidants may be incorporated in the aqueous phase (e.g.hydrophilic antioxidants) or in the disperse phase of the core (e.g.hydrophobic antioxidants such as, for example, vitamin E) for example upto 1% by weight, preferably between 0.01 and 0.50% by weight, morepreferably between 0.10 to 0.20% by weight.

The formulation may further comprise immune-enhancing nutrients such asvitamins A/B/C/E; carotenoids/beta-carotene and iron, manganese,selenium, zinc, especially when the formulation contains animmunosuppressant, as in the case of an immunosuppressant targeted tothe ileum and/or colon, e.g. the colon. Such nutrients may be present informulation, or if the formulation has a coating, for example if it isthe form of a bead, the nutrients may be included in the coating.

The formulation may also include other well know excipients used inpharmaceutical formulations including colorants, taste masking agents,diluents, fillers, binders etc. The presence of such optional additionalcomponents will of course depend upon the particular dosage formadopted.

Active Ingredients

The active ingredients suitable for use in the pharmaceuticalcompositions and methods of the present invention are not particularlylimited, as the compositions are surprisingly capable of deliveringactive ingredients with widely differing physico-chemical propertieswhilst still achieving have a higher total release of active from theformulation and/or a greater rate of release of the active compared to aformulation which does not have the coating. The active ingredient maybe hydrophilic, lipophilic, amphiphilic or hydrophobic. The activeingredient may be solubilised in the formulation. The active ingredientmay be suspended in the formulation. Active ingredients can be anycompound or mixture of compounds having therapeutic or other value whenadministered to an animal, particularly to a human or other mammal (theformulations of the invention are in particular for administration tohumans or other mammals), for example drugs, nutrients, cosmeceuticals,diagnostic agents, nutritional agents. In particular, the activeingredient is pharmaceutically active. It should be appreciated that thecategorisation of an active ingredient as hydrophilic or hydrophobic maychange, depending upon the particular salts, isomers, analogues andderivatives used. The active ingredient may be one mentioned in theexamples of this specification.

The active ingredient agent may be hydrophobic. Hydrophobic activeingredients are compounds with little or no water solubility. Intrinsicwater solubilities (i.e., water solubility of the non-ionised form) forhydrophobic active ingredients may be less than about 1% by weight, andtypically less than about 0.1% or 0.01% by weight. The active ingredientis in particular a hydrophobic drug.

Suitable hydrophobic active ingredients are not limited by therapeuticcategory, and can be, for example, analgesics, anti-inflammatory agents,antihelminthics, anti-arrhythmic agents, anti-bacterial agents,anti-viral agents, anti-coagulants, anti-depressants, anti-diabetics,anti-epileptics, anti-fungal agents, anti-gout agents, anti-hypertensiveagents, anti-malarials, anti-migraine agents, anti-muscarinic agents,anti-neoplastic agents, erectile dysfunction improvement agents,immunosuppressants, anti-protozoal agents, anti-thyroid agents,anxiolytic agents, sedatives, hypnotics, neuroleptics, beta-blockers,cardiac inotropic agents, corticosteroids, diuretics, anti-parkinsonianagents, gastro-intestinal agents, histamine receptor antagonists,hydroxylase inhibitors (e.g. asparaginyl hydroxylase inhibitors, prolylhydroxylase inhibitors), keratolytics, lipid regulating agents,anti-anginal agents, COX-2 inhibitors, leukotriene inhibitors,macrolides, muscle relaxants, nutritional agents, opioid analgesics,protease inhibitors, sex hormones, stimulants, muscle relaxants,anti-osteoporosis agents, anti-obesity agents, cognition enhancers,anti-urinary incontinence agents, nutritional oils, anti-benign prostatehypertrophy agents, essential fatty acids, non-essential fatty acids,and mixtures thereof.

Specific, non-limiting examples of suitable hydrophobic activeingredients are: acetretin, albendazole, albuterol, aminoglutethimide,amiodarone, amlodipine, amphetamine, amphotericin B, atorvastatin,atovaquone, azithromycin, baclofen, beclomethasone, benezepril,benzonatate, betamethasone, bicalutanide, budesonide, bupropion,busulfan, butenafine, calcifediol, calcipotriene, calcitriol,camptothecin, candesartan, capsaicin, carbamezepine, carotenes,celecoxib, cerivastatin, cetirizine, chlorpheniramine, cholecalciferol,cilostazol, cimetidine, cinnarizine, ciprofloxacin, cisapride,clarithromycin, clemastine, clomiphene, clomipramine, clopidogrel,codeine, coenzyme Q10, cyclobenzaprine, cyclosporins, danazol,dantrolene, dexchlorpheniramine, diclofenac, dicoumarol, digoxin,dehydroepiandrosterone, dihydroergotamine, dihydrotachysterol,dirithromycin, DMOG, donezepil, efavirenz, eposartan, ergocalciferol,ergotamine, essential fatty acid sources, etodolac, etoposide,famotidine, fenofibrate, fentanyl, fexofenadine, finasteride,fluconazole, flurbiprofen, fluvastatin, fosphenytoin, frovatriptan,furazolidone, gabapentin, gemfibrozil, glibenclamide, glipizide,glyburide, glimepiride, griseofulvin, halofantrine, ibuprofen,irbesartan, irinotecan, isosorbide dinitrate, isotretinoin,itraconazole, ivermectin, ketoconazole, ketorolac, lamotrigine,lansoprazole, leflunomide, lisinopril, loperamide, loratadine,lovastatin, L-thryroxine, lutein, lycopene, medroxyprogesterone,mifepristone, mefloquine, megestrol acetate, methadone, methoxsalen,metronidazole, miconazole, midazolam, miglitol, minoxidil, mitoxantrone,montelukast, nabumetone, nalbuphine, naratriptan, nelfinavir,nifedipine, nilsolidipine, nilutanide, nitrofurantoin, nizatidine,omeprazole, oprevelkin, oestradiol, oxaprozin, paclitaxel, paracalcitol,paroxetine, pentazocine, pioglitazone, pizofetin, pravastatin,prednisolone, probucol, progesterone, pseudoephedrine, pyridostigmine,rabeprazole, raloxifene, rofecoxib, repaglinide, rifabutine,rifapentine, rimexolone, ritanovir, rizatriptan, rosiglitazone,saquinavir, sertraline, sibutramine, sildenafil citrate, simvastatin,sirolimus, spironolactone, steroids, sumatriptan, tacrine, tacrolimus,tamoxifen, tamsulosin, targretin, tazarotene, telmisartan, teniposide,terbinafine, terazosin, tetrahydrocannabinol, tiagabine, ticlopidine,tirofibran, tizanidine, topiramate, topotecan, toremifene, tramadol,tretinoin, troglitazone, trovafloxacin, ubidecarenone, valsartan,venlafaxine, verteporfin, vigabatrin, vitamin A, vitamin D, vitamin E,vitamin K, zafirlukast, zileuton, zolmitriptan, zolpidem, and zopiclone.Of course, salts, isomers and derivatives of the above-listedhydrophobic active ingredients may also be used, as well as mixtures.

Among the above-listed hydrophobic active ingredients, there may inparticular be mentioned: celecoxib, cyclosporins and especiallycyclosporin A, sirolimus, steroids, tacrolimus, pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts, isomers and derivatives thereof, and mixtures thereof.The active ingredient may optionally not be celecoxib.

The active ingredient may be hydrophilic. Amphiphilic compounds are alsoincluded within the class of hydrophilic active ingredients. Apparentwater solubilities for hydrophilic active ingredients are greater thanabout 0.1% by weight, and typically greater than about 1% by weight. Thehydrophilic active ingredient is in particular a hydrophilic drug. Thehydrophilic active ingredient may be a cosmeceutical, a diagnosticagent, or a nutritional agent.

Suitable hydrophilic active ingredients are not limited by therapeuticcategory, and can be, for example, analgesics, anti-inflammatory agents,antihelminthics, anti-arrhythmic agents, anti-bacterial agents,anti-viral agents, anti-coagulants, anti-depressants, anti-diabetics,anti-epileptics, anti-fungal agents, anti-gout agents, anti-hypertensiveagents, anti-malarials, anti-migraine agents, anti-muscarinic agents,anti-neoplastic agents, erectile dysfunction improvement agents,immunosuppressants, anti-protozoal agents, anti-thyroid agents,anxiolytic agents, sedatives, hypnotics, neuroleptics, beta-blockers,cardiac inotropic agents, corticosteroids, diuretics, anti-parkinsonianagents, gastro-intestinal agents, histamine receptor antagonists,hydroxylase inhibitors (e.g. asparaginyl hydroxylase inhibitors, prolylhydroxylase inhibitors), keratolytics, lipid regulating agents,anti-anginal agents, COX-2 inhibitors, leukotriene inhibitors,macrolides, muscle relaxants, nutritional agents, opioid analgesics,protease inhibitors, sex hormones, stimulants, muscle relaxants,anti-osteoporosis agents, anti-obesity agents, cognition enhancers,anti-urinary incontinence agents, nutritional oils, anti-benign prostatehypertrophy agents, essential fatty acids, non-essential fatty acids,and mixtures thereof

Likewise, the hydrophilic active ingredient can be a cytokine, apeptidomimetic, a peptide, a protein, a toxoid, a serum, an antibody, avaccine, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, a portion of genetic material, anucleic acid, or a mixture thereof.

Specific, non-limiting examples of suitable hydrophilic activeingredients include: acarbose; acyclovir; acetyl cysteine; acetylcholinechloride; alatrofloxacin; alendronate; aglucerase; amantadinehydrochloride; ambenomium; amifostine; amiloride hydrochloride;aminocaproic acid; amphotericin B; antihemophilic factor (human),antihemophilic factor (porcine); antihemophilic factor (recombinant),aprotinin; asparaginase; atenolol; atracurium besylate; atropine;azithromycin; aztreonam; BCG vaccine; bacitracin; becalermin; belladona;bepridil hydrochloride; bleomnycin sulfate; calcitonin human; calcitoninsalmon; carboplatin; capecitabine; capreomycin sulfate; cefamandolenafate; cefazolin sodium; cefepime hydrochloride; cefixime; cefonicidsodium; cefoperazone; cefotetan disodium; cefotaxime; cefoxitin sodium;ceftizoxime; ceftriaxone; cefuroxime axetil; cephalexin; cephapirinsodium; cholera vaccine; chorionic gonadotropin; cidofovir; cisplatin;cladribine; clidinium bromide; clindamycin and clindamycin derivatives;ciprofloxacin; clodronate; colistimethate sodium; colistin sulfate;corticotropin; cosyntropin; cromolyn sodium; cytarabine; dalteparinsodium; danaparoid; desferrioxamine; denileukin diflitox; desmopressin;diatrizoate meglumine and diatrizoate sodium; dicyclomine; didanosine;dirithromycin; dopamine hydrochloride; dornase alpha; doxacuriumchloride; doxorubicin; etidronate disodium; enalaprilat; enkephalin;enoxaparin; enoxaprin sodium; ephedrine; epinephrine; epoetin alpha;erythromycin; esmolol hydrochloride; factor IX; famciclovir;fludarabine; fluoxetine; foscarnet sodium; ganciclovir; granulocytecolony stimulating factor, granulocyte-macrophage stimulating factor;growth hormones—recombinant human; growth hormone—bovine; gentamycin;glucagon; glycopyrolate; gonadotropin releasing hormone and syntheticanalogues thereof; GnRH; gonadorelin; grepafloxacin; haemophilus Bconjugate vaccine; hepatitis A virus vaccine inactivated; hepatitis Bvirus vaccine inactivated; heparin sodium; hydralazine, indinavirsulfate; influenza virus vaccine; interleukin-2; interleukin-3;insulin-human, insulin lispro; insulin porcine; insulin NPH; insulinaspart; insulin glargine; insulin detemir; interferon alpha; interferonbeta; ipratropium bromide; ifosfamide; Japanese encephalitis virusvaccine; lamivudine; leucovorin calcium; leuprolide acetate,levofloxacin; lincomycin and lincomycin derivatives; lobucavir;lomefloxacin; loracarbef; mannitol; measles virus vaccine; meningococcalvaccine; menotropins; mepenzolate bromide; mesalamine; methenamine;methotrexate; methscopolamine; metformin hydrochloride; metoprolol;mezocillin sodium; mivacurium chloride; mumps viral vaccine; nedocromilsodium; neostigmine bromide; neostigmine methyl sulfate; neurontin;norfloxacin; octreotide acetate; ofloxacin; olpadronate; oxytocin;pamidronate disodium; pancuronium bromide; paroxetine; perfloxacin;pentamidine isethionate; pentostatin; pentoxifylline; periciclovir;pentagastrin; pentholamine mesylate; phenylalanine; physostigminesalicylate; plague vaccine; piperacillin sodium; platelet derived growthfactor-human; pneumococcal vaccine polyvalent; poliovirus vaccineinactivated; poliovirus vaccine live (OPV); polymyxin B sulfate;pralidoxime chloride; pramlintide, pregabalin; propafenone;propenthaline bromide; pyridostigmine bromide; rabies vaccine;residronate; ribavarin; rimantadine hydrochloride; rotavirus vaccine;salmeterol xinafoate; sinealide; small pox vaccine; solatol;somatostatin; sparfloxacin; spectinomycin; stavudine; streptokinase;streptozocin; suxamethonium chloride; tacrine hydrochloride; terbutalinesulfate; thiopeta; ticarcillin; tiludronate; timolol; tissue typeplasminogen activator; TNFR:Fc; TNK-tPA; trandolapril; trimetrexategluconate; trospectinomycin; trovafloxacin; tubocurarine chloride; tumornecrosis factor; typhoid vaccine live; urea; urokinase; vancomycin;valacyclovir; valsartan; varicella virus vaccine live; vasopressin andvasopressin derivatives; vecuronium bromide; vinblastine; vincristine;vinorelbine; vitamin B12; warfarin sodium; yellow fever vaccine;zalcitabine; zanamivir; zolendronate; zidovudine; pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts, isomers and derivatives thereof; and mixtures thereof.

Among the above-listed hydrophilic active ingredients, there may bementioned in particular hydralazine and mesalamine.

Optionally, the active ingredient may be cyclosporin A, hydralazine,mesalamine or celecoxib.

Shape, Size and Geometry

The formulation of the invention can be formed into a limitless numberof shapes and sizes. In the section below describing the process formaking the formulation, various methods are given including pouring orintroducing a fluid dispersion into a mould where it hardens or can becaused to harden. Thus the formulation can be created in whichever formis desired by creating an appropriate mould (e.g. in the shape of adisc, pill or tablet). However, it is not essential to use a mould. Forexample, the formulation may be formed into a sheet e.g. resulting frompouring a fluid dispersion onto a flat surface where it hardens or canbe caused to harden.

Preferably, the formulation may be in the form of spheres orspherical-like shapes made as described below. Preferably, theformulation of the invention is in the form of substantially spherical,seamless minibeads. The absence of seams on the minibead surface is anadvantage e.g. in further processing, for example coating, since itallows more consistent coating, flowability etc. The absence of seams onthe minbeads also enhances consistency of dissolution of the beads.

The preferred size or diameter range of minibeads according to theinvention can be chosen to avoid retention in the stomach upon oraladministration of the minibeads. Larger dosage forms are retained forvariable periods in the stomach and pass the pyloric sphincter only withfood whereas smaller particles pass the pylorus independently of food.Selection of the appropriate size range (see below) thus makes thetherapeutic effect post-dosing more consistent. Compared to a singlelarge monolithic oral format such as, for example, a traditionalcompressed pill, a population of beads released into the GI tract (asforeseen by the dosage form of the present invention) permits greaterintestinal lumen dispersion so enhancing absorption via exposure togreater epithelial area, and achieves greater topical coating in certainparts of the GI tract for example the colon). Reduction of residencetime in the ileo-caecal junction is another potential advantage.

The formulation of the invention is preferably monolithic meaninginternally (i.e. cross-sectionally) homogeneous, excluding a possiblethin skin of matrix material and excluding any coating layers.

The minibeads provided for by the formulation of the present inventiongenerally range in diameter from 0.5 mm to 10 mm with the upper limitpreferably 5 mm, e.g. 2.5 mm A particularly convenient upper limit is 2mm or 1.7 mm. The lower limit can preferably be 1 mm, e.g. 1.2 mm, morepreferably from 1.3 mm, most preferably from 1.4 mm. In one embodimentthe diameter is from 0.5 to 2.5 mm, for example from 1 mm to 3 mm, 1 mmto 2 mm, 1.2 mm to 3 mm or 1.2 mm to 2 mm. The minibeads may have adiameter of no more than 2.5 mm, irrespective of their minimum size. Thebeads may have a diameter of no more than 2 mm, irrespective of theirminimum size.

A minibead as described herein may have an aspect ratio of no more than1.5, e.g. of no more than 1.3, for example of no more than 1.2 and, inparticular, of from 1.1 to 1.5, 1.1 to 1.3 or, 1.1 to 1.2. A populationof minibeads as described herein, e.g. at least 10 beads, may have anaverage aspect ratio of no more than 1.5, e.g. of no more than 1.3, forexample of no more than 1.2 and, in particular, of from 1 to 1.5, 1 to1.3 or 1 to 1.2. The aspect ratios mentioned in this paragraphoptionally apply to coated minibeads and optionally apply to uncoatedminibeads. Average aspect ratio is suitably determined for a populationof minibeads, e.g. at least 10 minibeads, using a particle sizeanalyser, for example an Eyecon™ particle characteriser of InnopharmaLabs, Dublin 18, Ireland.

The minibeads of the disclosure may, therefore, have a size as disclosedabove and an aspect ratio of from 1 to 1.5. The beads of the disclosuremay have a size as disclosed above and an aspect ratio of no more than1.3, for example of no more than 1.2 and, in particular, of from 1.1 to1.5, 1.1 to 1.3 or, 1.1 to 1.2.

Bead size (diameter) may be measured by any suitable technique, forexample microscopy, sieving, sedimentation, optical sensing zone method,electrical sensing zone method or laser light scattering. For thepurposes of this specification, bead size is measured by analyticalsieving in accordance with USP General Test <786> Method I (USP 24-NF18, (U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention, Rockville, Md., 2000), pp.1965-1967).

In embodiments, minibeads of the invention are monodisperse. In otherembodiments, minibeads of the invention are not monodisperse. By“monodisperse” is meant that for a population of beads (e.g. at least100, more preferably at least 1000) the minibeads have a coefficient ofvariation (CV) of their diameters of 35% or less, optionally 25% orless, for example 15% or less, such as e.g. of 10% or less andoptionally of 8% or less, e.g. 5% or less. A particular class of polymerbeads has a CV of 25% or less. CV when referred to in this specificationis defined as 100 times (standard deviation) divided by average where“average” is mean particle diameter and standard deviation is standarddeviation in particle size. Such a determination of CV is performableusing a sieve.

The invention includes minibeads having a CV of 35% and a mean diameterof 1 mm to 2 mm, e.g. 1.5 mm. The invention also includes minibeadshaving a CV of 20% and a mean diameter of 1 mm to 2 mm, e.g. 1.5 mm, aswell as minibeads having a CV of 10% and a mean diameter of 1 mm to 2mm, e.g. 1.5 mm. In one class of embodiments, 90% of minibeads have adiameter of from 0.5 mm to 2.5 mm, e.g. of from 1 mm to 2 mm.

Dosage Forms

The formulation of the invention is prepared as an orally administrabledosage form suitable for pharmaceutical use. In those embodiments wherethe formulation is in the form of a minibead, the present inventionprovides for a dosage form comprising a plurality of the minibeads forexample as a capsule, a tablet, a sprinkle or a sachet.

In embodiments the dosage form comprising a population of beads may bepresented in a single unit dosage form e.g. contained in a single hardgel capsule which releases the beads e.g. in the stomach. Alternativelythe beads may be presented in a sachet or other container which permitsthe beads to be sprinkled onto food or into a drink or to beadministered via a feeding tube for example a naso-gastric tube or aduodenal feeding tube. Alternatively, the beads may be administered as atablet for example if a population of beads is compressed into a singletablet as described below. Alternatively, the beads may be filled e.g.compressed into a specialist bottle cap or otherwise fill a space in aspecialised bottle cap or other element of a sealed container (orcontainer to be sealed) such that e.g. on twisting the bottle cap, thebeads are released into a fluid or other contents of the bottle or vialsuch that the beads are disperse (or dissolve) with or without agitationin such contents. An example is the Smart Delivery Cap manufactured byHumana Pharma International (HPI) S.p.A, Milan, Italy.

The dosage form may be formulated in such a way so that the beads of theinvention can be further developed to create a larger mass of beads e.g.via compression (with appropriate oil or powder-based binder and/orfiller known to persons skilled in the art. The larger (e.g. compressed)mass may itself take a variety of shapes including pill shapes, tabletshapes, capsule shapes etc. A particular problem which this version ofthe bead embodiment solves is the “dead space” (above the settledparticulate contents) and/or “void space” (between the particulatecontent elements) typically found in hard gel capsules filled withpowders or pellets. In such pellet- or powder-filled capsules withdead/void space, a patient is required to swallow a larger capsule thanwould be necessary if the capsules contained no such dead space. Thebeads of this embodiment of the invention may readily be compressed intoa capsule to adopt the inner form of whichever capsule or shell may bedesired leaving much reduced, e.g. essentially no, dead/void space.Alternatively the dead or void space can be used to advantage bysuspending beads in a vehicle such as, for example, an oil which may beinert or may have functional properties such as, for example,permeability enhancement or enhanced dissolution or may comprise anactive ingredient being the same or different from any activeingredients in the bead. For example, hard gelatin or HPMC capsules maybe filled with a liquid medium combined with uncoated and/or coatedbeads. The liquid medium may be one or more of the surfactant phaseconstituents described herein or it may be one or more surfactants.Particularly preferred but non-limiting examples are corn oil, sorbitanetrioleate (sold under the trade mark SPAN 85), propylene glycoldicaprylocaprate (sold under the trade mark Labrafac),2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol (sold under the trade mark Transcutol P) andpolysorbate 80 (sold under the trade mark Tween 80).

In a representative embodiment the bead of the dosage form is preparedas described herein for example by mixing together at least thefollowing materials: a hydrogel-forming polymer; and cyclosporin A,suitably cyclosporin A dissolved in a hydrophobic material, such as anoil to form a dispersion of the cyclosporin A in the hydrogel-formingpolymer. The dispersion is immobilized within the solidified bead byejection from a single orifice nozzle into a suitable cooling liquid.Following removal of the drying liquid the bead is coated with amodified release coating (the second coating) (suitably with a sub-coatunder the modified release coating), the coated bead is the filled intoa gelatin or HPMC capsule suitable for pharmaceutical use.

Suitably the dosage form is prepared as a unit dosage form containingfrom for oral administration comprising from 0.1 mg to 1000 mg,optionally from 1 mg to 500 mg, for example 10 mg to 300 mg, or 25 to250 mg suitably about 25 mg, about 35 mg, about 50 mg, about 75 mg,about 100 mg, about 150 mg, about 180 mg, about 200 mg, about 210 mg orabout 250 mg cyclosporin A

Determination of Contents and Distribution of Formulations

The identity and/or distribution of one or more of the components of aformulation according to the invention can be determined by any methodknown to those skilled in the art. The distribution of one or morecomponents of a formulation can, for example, be determined bynear-infrared (NIR) chemical imaging technology. NIR chemical imagingtechnology can be used to generate images of the surface or crosssection of a formulation, for example a minibead. The image produced bythis technique shows the distribution of one or more components of theformulation. In addition to NIR chemical imaging technology, thedistribution of one or more components of a formulation such asminibead, for example, be determined by time-of-flight secondary ionmass spectrometry (ToFSIMS). ToFSIMS imaging can reveal the distributionof one or more components within the formulation. The images produced byToFSIMS analysis or NIR analysis can show the distribution of componentsacross a surface of the formulation or a cross section of theformulation. The methods described in this paragraph are applicable, forexample, to formulations comprising a polymer matrix, e.g. a dried,colloid, solution or dispersion.

Manufacturing Processes

Various methods may be used to prepare the formulations of theinvention.

In those embodiments where the formulation comprises an activeingredient in a water-insoluble polymer matrix, a basic method formaking the core is to mix a fluid form of the matrix material, forexample a water-insoluble polymer matrix material (e.g. poly(amides),poly(amino-acids), hyaluronic acid; lipoproteins; poly(esters),poly(orthoesters), poly(urethanes) or poly(acrylamides), poly(glycolicacid), poly(lactic acid) and corresponding co-polymers(poly(lactide-co-glycolide acid; PLGA); siloxane, polysiloxane;dimethylsiloxane/methylvinylsiloxane copolymer;poly(dimethyl-siloxane/methylvinylsiloxane/methylhydrogensiloxane)dimethylvinyl or trimethyl copolymer; silicone polymers; alkyl silicone;silica, aluminium silicate, calcium silicate, aluminium magnesiumsilicate, magnesium silicate, diatomaceous silica etc as described moregenerally elsewhere herein), with an active ingredient to form a mixturethat may take the form of a suspension, solution or a colloid. Themixture is processed to form a core. For example the formulation may beshaped into the desired form using a molding or hot-melt extrusionprocess to form beads.

Methods for preparing cores comprising an active ingredient and awater-soluble polymer matrix are described below. Generally these coresare coated to give the final formulation of the invention.

Generally, the manufacturing processes described herein comprise mixingof liquid(s). Such mixing processes must be performed at temperatures atwhich the substances to be mixed in the liquid state are in liquid form.For example, thermoreversible gelling agents must be mixed at atemperature where they are in the liquid state, for example at atemperature of 50 to 75° C., for example 50 to 70° C., or 55-75° C.,e.g. 60-70° C. and in particular embodiments about 55° C. or 65° C. inthe case of mixing formulations comprising aqueous gelatin. Similarlyother components of the formulation may need to be heated to melt thecomponent for example waxes or surfactants which may be used in thedisperse phase.

Cores comprising a hydrogel-forming polymer and an active ingredient asdisclosed herein may be made by mixing materials comprising for examplewater, a hydrogel-forming polymer and a surfactant to form an aqueouscontinuous phase, and mixing a disperse phase. At least one of theaqueous phase and the disperse phase comprises a pharmaceutically activeingredient, the active ingredient may be dissolved in the phase whichcontains it, for example both phases may be a clear liquid before theyare mixed together. For example, the disperse phase may comprise anactive ingredient, (for example a disperse phase comprising an oil, anoptional solvent, cyclosporin A or another hydrophobic active and asurfactant) with the aqueous phase to form a colloid; the activeingredient may in particular be a hydrophobic active ingredient e.g.cyclosporin A or alternatively it may be a hydrophilic activeingredient, or a combination comprising e.g. a hydrophobic activeingredient and a hydrophilic active ingredient. The colloid may have theform of an emulsion or microemulsion wherein the disperse phase isdispersed in the aqueous continuous phase. The hydrogel-forming polymeris then caused or allowed to gel. Suitably, the process includesformulating or processing the core formulation into a desired form, e.g.a bead (also termed a minibead), which forming process may comprisemoulding but preferably comprises ejecting the aqueous colloid through asingle orifice nozzle to form droplets which are caused or allowed topass into a cooling medium, e.g. a water-immiscible cooling liquid, inwhich the droplets cool to form for e.g. beads.

The mixing of the materials may comprise mixing an aqueous premix (oraqueous phase) and a disperse phase premix (e.g. oil phase premix),wherein the aqueous premix comprises water and water-soluble substanceswhilst the disperse phase premix may comprise a vehicle containing anactive ingredient. The vehicle may be a hydrophobic liquid, for examplea liquid lipid, or it may be or comprise a material, for example asurfactant, for forming self-assembly structures. In particular, adisperse phase premix may comprise an active ingredient, for examplecyclosporin A, oil and other oil soluble components for examplesurfactant and an optional solvent. The premixes may contain one or moresurfactants suitable for the phase they are to form, as previouslymentioned.

The aqueous premix comprises, or usually consists of, a solution inwater of water-soluble constituents, namely the hydrogel-forming polymerand water-soluble excipient(s), and any water-soluble active ingredientdestined for the matrix phase. The aqueous premix may include aplasticiser for the hydrogel-forming polymer, as described elsewhere inthis specification. The aqueous premix may include a surfactant, e.g. toincrease polymer viscosity and improve emulsification and thereby helpprevent precipitation of active agent during processing. SDS is anexample of such a surfactant. In any event, the constituents of theaqueous premix may be agitated for a period sufficient to dissolve/meltthe components, for example, from 1 hour to 12 hours to form thecompleted aqueous premix.

The disperse phase pre-mix may comprise a hydrophobic active ingredientas a dispersion or preferably a solution in a vehicle as describedabove, for example in a liquid comprising an oil or in a liquidcomprising component(s) of self-assembly structures. For example an oilphase pre-mix may therefore be a liquid lipid, for example a mediumchain triglyceride (MCT) formulation, the medium chain triglyceride(s)being one or more triglycerides of at least one fatty acid selected fromC₆-012 fatty acids, and cyclosporin A or another hydrophobic activeingredient. Suitably an oil phase pre-mix is stirred at ambienttemperature to form a solution of the active ingredient in the oil. Insome embodiments, the components of the oil phase premix are mixed (orotherwise agitated) for a period of, for example, 10 minutes to 3 hoursto form the premix. The disperse phase premix may comprise a hydrophilicactive ingredient in particulate form, for example microparticles ornanoparticles; the particulate active ingredient may for example besuspended in a vehicle comprising or consisting of an oil, e.g. a liquidlipid.

The two premixes may be combined and agitated, for example for a periodof a few seconds to an hour, for example from 30 seconds to 1 hour,suitably 5 mins to an hour, to form a dispersion of the disperse phasein an aqueous hydrogel-forming polymer, which dispersion may then befurther processed to form the final formulation. The two premixes may becombined into the dispersion by agitation in a mixing vessel; they mayadditionally or alternatively be combined in a continuous flow mixer.

Where the disperse phase is particulate, the manufacturing process maynot involve combining two liquid premixes but may instead comprisecombining the particulate ingredient directly into the liquid which isto form the continuous phase (water, hydrogel-forming polymer and anyother constituents), or into a precursor of the liquid. There is therebyformed a liquid comprising dispersed particulate active ingredient, andthis dispersion is then formed into the core by a process whichcomprises causing or allowing the polymer to gel.

The basic method for making a core comprising an active ingredient andhydrogel-forming polymer matrix, therefore, is to mix a liquid form(preferably a solution) of the hydrogel-forming polymer (or mixture ofpolymers) with the active ingredient (and other disperse phasecomponents) to form a dispersion in the polymer, which later in theprocess forms a hydrogel. The method normally comprises mixing togetheran aqueous polymer phase premix and a disperse phase premix. Takingaccount of the final formulation required (as described elsewhereherein), the disperse phase pre-mix and the liquid hydrogel-formingpolymer (i.e. the solution or suspension of hydrogel-forming polymer)may be mixed in a weight ratio of from 1:1 to 1:10, particularly 1:4 to1:9, e.g. 1:5 to 1:7. In general, only gentle stirring of the componentsis required using a magnetic or mechanical system, e.g. overheadstirrer, as would be familiar to a person skilled in the art to achievea dispersion of the disperse phase in the aqueous phase to form acolloid (which may be in the form of for example an emulsion or microemulsion in which the aqueous hydrogel is the continuous phase).Continuous stirring is preferred. Mixing may also be achieved using anin-line mixing system. Any appropriate laboratory stirring apparatus orindustrial scale mixer may be utilized for this purpose for example theMagnetic Stirrer (manufactured by Stuart) or Overhead Stirrer (by KNF orFisher). It is preferred to set up the equipment in such a way as tominimise evaporation of contents such as, for example, water. In oneembodiment of the process of the invention, it is preferred to utilise aclosed system for stirring in order to achieve this aim. In-line mixingmay be particularly suitable for closed system processing. Suitablymixing of the two components takes place at a temperature of 50 to 70°C., or 55-75° C., e.g. 60-70° C.

The mixing of the two phases results in a colloid wherein the aqueoushydrogel-forming polymer is an aqueous continuous phase and thecomponent(s) not soluble in the aqueous phase are a disperse phase. Thecolloid may have the form of an emulsion or microemulsion.

In embodiments where the disperse phase is or comprises a surfactant,the amount of the surfactant may be selected such that, upon combinationof the disperse phase premix with the aqueous pre-mix, the surfactantconcentration in the combined mixture exceeds the CMC for the surfactantused such that micelles are formed in the aqueous phase comprising thehydrogel-forming polymer. Depending on the concentration of surfactantused, self-assembly structures other than micelles may also form. TheCMC for a particular surfactant may be determined using well knownmethods, for example as described in Surfactants and Polymers in AqueousSolutions Second Edition, Chapter 2, Holmberg et al. In embodimentsmixing of the aqueous phase and a disperse phase which is or comprises asurfactant may result in the formation of a clear liquid, for example amicroemulsion, in which the aqueous phase comprising thehydrogel-forming polymer is the continuous phase. Microemulsions are athermodynamically stable dispersion of self-assembly structures in theaqueous phase, the size of the self-assembly structures beingsufficiently small to give a transparent appearance. The size of theself-assembly structures present as the disperse phase resulting fromthe mixing of the aqueous and surfactant phases may be from about 0.5 nmto 200 nm, for example about 1 nm to 50 nm, or about 5 nm to 25 nm. Thesize of the self-assembly structures formed and other characteristicssuch as the optical isotropicity of the formulation (for example amicroemulsion) may be determined using well known techniques such asdynamic light scattering.

Where the polymer matrix substantially consists of gelatin with theaddition of sorbitol, the aqueous phase of polymer matrix is prepared byadding the appropriate quantities of sorbitol (and surfactant ifdesired) to water, heating to approximately 50 to 75° C., for example60-75° C. until in solution and then adding gelatin, although theprecise order and timing of addition is not critical. A typical “gelatinsolution” comprises 8 to 35%, (for example 15-25%, preferably 17-18%)gelatin; 65%-85% (preferably 77-82%) of water plus from 1-5% (preferably1.5 to 3%) sorbitol. When present, surfactant (e.g. anionic surfactant)in the aqueous phase premix may be present in an amount of 0.1 to 5%(preferably 0.5 to 4%) wherein all parts are by weight of the aqueousphase.

Optionally the processing temperature required for a standard gelatincan be reduced to a desirable target temperature e.g. 37° C. by use oflower melting-point gelatin (or gelatin derivatives or mixtures ofgelatins with melting point reducers) or other polymer matrix materialsuch as, for example, sodium alginate. If gelatin droplets are beingformed by machine extrusion and immediately cooled, e.g. in a coolingbath, additional appropriate inlet tubing can be used to introduce anoil phase containing cyclosporin A at ambient temperature into thehotter fluid gelatin solution (and the mixture can be immediatelyhomogenized) very shortly before ejection from a beading nozzle or otherdropletting process such that the duration of exposure of thecyclosporin A to the higher temperature gelatin is limited so reducingthe degree of any heat-dependent degradation of the active ingredient.This process may use any appropriate device such as, for example, ahomogenizer, e.g. a screw homogenizer, in conjunction with anextrusion-type apparatus as described for example in WO 2008/132707(Sigmoid Pharma) the entirety of which is incorporated herein byreference.

The colloid is formed by combining of the disperse phase premix orparticulate active ingredient with the liquid aqueous phase withstirring as described above. The resultant colloidal dispersion then hasthe formulation of a solidified core described above but with liquidwater still present in the core formulation.

Optionally the active ingredient may be added after mixing the aqueousphase and other components of a disperse phase of the type comprising avehicle in addition to the active ingredient, however, it is preferredthat the active ingredient is added together with the other componentsof the disperse phase as a premix.

The resulting colloid is then poured or introduced into a mould or othervessel or poured onto sheets or between sheets or delivered dropwise (orextruded) into another fluid such that the polymer matrix-containingaqueous phase, on solidification, takes the form of the mould, vessel,sheet or droplet/bead intended. It is preferred to progress tomould-forming e.g. beading without delay.

Solidification (gelling) can occur in a variety of ways depending on thepolymer of the matrix, for example by changing the temperature aroundthe mould, vessel, sheet, droplet/bead etc or by applying asolidification fluid or hardening solution so that the moulded shape isgelled or solidified. In certain embodiments both temperature change andapplication of a solidifying fluid or hardening solution are employedtogether or simultaneously.

In the preferred embodiment in which the core comprising the activeingredient takes the form of beads, the beads may be formed for exampleby dropping the colloid dropwise into a fluid which effectssolidification. Where the viscosity of the formulation to be beadedreaches a certain point, drop formation becomes more difficult andspecialised apparatus is then preferred.

By use of the term “dry”, it is not sought to imply that a drying stepis necessary to produce the dry core (although this is not excluded)rather that the solid or solidified aqueous external phase issubstantially free of water or free of available water. Solidificationof the aqueous phase (external phase) may have arisen through variousmeans including chemically (e.g. by cross-linking) or physically (e.g.by cooling or heating). In this respect, the term “aqueous phase” isnevertheless employed in this document to denote the external(continuous) phase of the core even though water, in certainembodiments, is largely absent from (or trapped within the cross-linkedmatrix of) the core. The external phase of the core is howeverwater-soluble and dissolves in aqueous media.

In the case where solidification can be achieved by raising or reducingtemperature, the temperature of the solidification fluid can be adaptedto achieve solidification of the core at a desired rate. For example,when gelatin is used as the hydrogel-forming polymer, the solidificationfluid is at a lower temperature than the temperature of the emulsionthus causing solidification, i.e. gelling, of the polymer matrix. Inthis case, the solidification fluid is termed a cooling fluid.

In the case where solidification can be achieved chemically, e.g. byinduction of cross-linking on exposure to a component of thesolidification fluid, the concentration of such component in thesolidification fluid and/or its temperature (or other characteristic orcontent) can be adjusted to achieve the desired rate and degree ofsolidification. For example, if alginate is chosen as the polymermatrix, one component of the solidification fluid may be acalcium-containing entity (such as, for example, calcium chloride) ableto induce cross-linking of the alginate and consequent solidification.Alternatively, the same or similar calcium-containing entity may beincluded (e.g. disperse) in the aqueous phase of the fluid emulsionprior to beading and triggered to induce cross-linking e.g. by applyinga higher or lower pH to a solidification fluid into which droplets ofemulsion fall dropwise or are introduced. Such electrostaticcross-linking can be varied as to the resulting characteristics of thebead by control of calcium ion availability (concentration) and otherphysical conditions (notably temperature). The solidification fluid maybe a gas (for example air) or a liquid or both. For example, whengelatin is used as the hydrogel-forming polymer matrix, thesolidification fluid can be initially gaseous (e.g. droplets passingthrough cooling air) and then subsequently liquid (e.g. droplets passinginto a cooling liquid). The reverse sequence may also be applied whilegaseous or liquid cooling fluids alone may also be used. Alternatively,the fluid may be spray-cooled in which the emulsion is sprayed into acooling gas to effect solidification.

In the case of gelatin or other water-soluble polymer (or polymermixture) destined to form an immobilization matrix, it is preferred thatthe solidification fluid be a non-aqueous liquid (such as, for example,medium chain triglycerides, mineral oil or similar preferably with lowHLB to ensure minimal wetting) which can conveniently be placed in abath (cooling bath) to receive the droplets of the colloid as theysolidify to form the beads of the core. Use of a non-aqueous liquidallows greater flexibility in choice of the temperature at which coolingis conducted.

Where a liquid cooling bath is employed, it is generally maintained atless than 20° C., preferably maintained in the range 5-15° C., morepreferably 8-12° C. when standard gelatin is used as thehydrogel-forming polymer. If a triglyceride is chosen as the coolingfluid in the cooling bath, a preferred example is Miglyol 810 fromSasol.

If alginate is selected as the polymer matrix, a typical method ofmaking beads involves dropwise addition of a 3% sodium alginate solutionin which oil droplets are disperse as described above into a 4° C.crosslinking bath containing 0.1 M calcium chloride to produce calciumalginate (this method can be referred to as “diffusion setting” becausethe calcium is believed to diffuse into the beads to effectcross-linking or setting). Using a syringe pump, or Inotech machine,droplets can be generated or extruded (egg at 5 mL/h if a pump is used)through a sterile needle or other nozzle (described elsewhere herein)which can be vibrating as discussed elsewhere herein. Airflow of between15 and 20 L/min through 4.5 mm tubing can be applied downwards over theneedle to reduce droplet size if desired. Newly formed beads can then bestirred in the calcium chloride bath for up to an hour. If carrageenanis used as the polymer matrix both salt and reduction in temperaturee.g. by dropping into cooling oil may be used to obtain solidification.

An alternative approach when using alginate is internal gelation inwhich the calcium ions are disperse in the aqueous phase prior to theiractivation in order to cause gelation of hydrocolloid particles. Forexample, this can be achieved by the addition of an inactive form of theion that will cause crosslinking of the alginate, which is thenactivated by a change in e.g. pH after sufficient dispersion of the ionis complete (see Glicksman, 1983a; Hoefler, 2004 which are bothincorporated herein by reference). This approach is particularly usefulwhere rapid gelation is desired and/or where the diffusion approach maylead to loss of API by diffusion thereof into the crosslinking bath.

Where another ionotropic polymer is used than alginate, suitableanalogous processes may be used to those described herein in relation toalginate.

Following shape-forming, moulding or beading, the resultant shapes orforms may be washed then dried if appropriate. In the case of beadssolidified in a solidification fluid, an optional final step in themethod of production described above therefore comprises removal of thesolidified beads from the solidification fluid. This may be achievede.g. by collection in a mesh basket through which the solidificationfluid (e.g. medium chain triglycerides) is drained and the beadsretained and is preferably conducted without delay e.g. as soon as thebeads have formed or within 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 minutes of theirformation. Excess solidification fluid may then be removed using acentrifuge (or other apparatus or machine adapted to remove excessfluid) followed by drying of the beads to remove water or free waterand/or removal of some or all of any additional solvent e.g. ethanol orisopropyl alcohol used to dissolve or facilitate dissolution of theactive principle in preceding steps optionally followed by washing (e.g.using ethyl acetate) and a subsequent “drying” step to remove excesssolvent (e.g. ethyl acetate). Isopropyl alcohol is an example of asolvent which is preferably removed later in processing to reduceresidues in the oil or aqueous phase. Drying can be achieved by anysuitable process known in the art such as use of a drum drier (e.g.Freund Drum dryer which may be part of the Spherex equipment train ifused) with warm air at between 15° C. and 25° C., preferably around 20°C. leading to evaporation or entrainment of the water by the air.Alternatively, drying may be carried out using of a fluid bed drier(e.g. Glatt GPCG 1.1) with warm air between 40° C. and 60° C. Use ofgelatin as the polymer matrix (e.g. as principal constituent of theaqueous immobilisation phase) in most cases requires a drying step andfor beads this is preferably achieved by drying in air as abovedescribed. The resultant formulation (the formulation of the invention)is essentially dry as described in more detail above.

In general, the beads may be generated by the application of surfacetension between the liquid dispersion (the mixture of the aqueous andsurfactant phases) and an appropriate solidification fluid such as, forexample, gas or liquid in order to create the spherical or substantiallyspherical shape of the ultimate beads.

Alternatively, the beads may be produced through ejection or extrusionof the liquid dispersion through an orifice or nozzle with a certaindiameter and optionally subject to vibration (using selected vibrationalfrequencies) and/or gravitational flow. Examples of machines which maybe used are encapsulation prilling, drop pelletising, spray cooling orspray congealing machines for example the Freund Spherex, ITAS/Lambo,Globex, Inotech, GEA Niro, Droppo, Buchi, Gelpell processing equipmentprocessing equipment. Operation of the Spherex machine manufactured byFreund as may be desired to manufacture beads according to the presentinvention is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,882,680 (Freund), the entirecontents of which are incorporated herein by reference. It is preferredto select a vibrational frequency in the region of 2-200 Hz, suitably10-15 Hz, although the ultimate choice (and separately the amplitude ofvibration selected) depends on the viscosity of the dispersion to bebeaded. If the polymer matrix is chosen to solidify at lowertemperature, it may be appropriate to maintain the lines to theorifice/nozzle at a certain temperature to maintain the fluidity of thesolution. Suitably the colloid is ejected through a single-orificenozzle, e.g. having a diameter of from 0.1 mm to 5 mm (for example 0.5-5mm), to form drops which are then caused or allowed to fall into acooling oil or other hardening medium and allowed to harden to formseeds, after which the seeds are recovered from the cooling oil anddried.

It will be appreciated, therefore, that the invention includes a processfor manufacturing a core comprising a pharmaceutically active ingredientin a polymer matrix, which process comprises: forming an aqueous premixwhich comprises water and water soluble/dispersible materials (includingtherefore a hydrogel-forming polymer) and a disperse phase premix (e.g.an oil phase premix) which comprises the active ingredient andoptionally a vehicle and other excipients (e.g. oil(s) and oilsoluble/dispersible materials), and combining the two premixes to form acolloid (disperse phase) within an aqueous phase comprising thehydrogel-forming polymer. The colloid may then be formed into a shapedunit, for example a bead to provide the core comprising the activeingredient. More particularly the manufacture of a core comprisingpharmaceutically active ingredient and a polymer matrix (suitably ahydrogel-forming polymer matrix may comprise:

(i) forming an aqueous phase pre-mix comprising a solution in water ofwater-soluble constituents (e.g. of a hydrogel-forming polymer, anywater-soluble excipient(s), as described elsewhere herein);(ii) forming a disperse phase pre-mix typically comprising a dispersionor preferably a solution of an active ingredient, e.g. cyclosporin A, ina liquid, optionally where the liquid is an oil (and optionally togetherwith other disperse phase constituents (e.g. surfactant, solvents etc asdescribed elsewhere herein));(iii) mixing the aqueous phase pre-mix (i) and the disperse phasepre-mix (ii) to form a colloid;(iv) ejecting the colloid through a nozzle to form droplets;(v) causing or allowing the a hydrogel-forming polymer to gel orsolidify to form a water soluble polymer matrix; and(vi) drying the solid.

Some manufacturing processes comprise steps (A) to (D) below or,alternatively, a manufacturing process may comprise a single one or anycombination of steps (A) to (D).

(A) Exemplary Preparation of Aqueous Phase:

Aqueous phase components are added to water, e.g. purified water, underagitation e.g. sonication or stirring. The temperature is graduallyincreased, for example to 60-70° C. and in particular 65° C., to achievecomplete dissolution of the solids. The aqueous phase components includea hydrogel-forming polymer, e.g. gelatin or agar and optionally one ormore other excipients, for example D-sorbitol (a plasticiser) andsurfactant (for example SDS). Possible aqueous phase components aredescribed elsewhere herein.

The gelatin may be Type A gelatin. In some less preferredimplementations, the gelatin is Type B. The gelatin may have a Bloomstrength of 125-300, optionally of 200-300, for example of 250-300, andin particular 275. The components of the aqueous phase may be agitatedfor a period of, for example, from 1 hour to 12 hours to completepreparation of the aqueous phase (aqueous premix).

(B) Exemplary Preparation of Disperse Phase:

A hydrophobic active ingredient, e.g. cyclosporin A, is mixed with otherdisperse phase components (for example an oil, surfactant andco-solvent) under agitation e.g. sonication or stirring, suitably atambient temperature to disperse or preferably dissolve the activeingredient.

(C) Exemplary Mixing of the Two Phases

The aqueous phase and the disperse phase are mixed. The two phases maybe mixed in a desired weight; for example, the weight ratio of dispersephase to aqueous phase may be from 1:1 to 1:10, e.g. from 1:4 to 1:9 andoptionally from 1:5 to 1:8 such as about 1:5 or about 1:7. The resultingcolloid is agitated, e.g. sonicated or stirred, at a temperature of60-70° C. and in particular 65° C., to achieve a homogeneous dispersion,then the homogenous dispersion is formed into beads. In particular, thehomogenous dispersion is ejected through a single orifice nozzle to formdroplets which fall into a cooling medium. The nozzle is suitablyvibrated to facilitate droplet formation. The nozzle may be vibrated ata frequency of 2-200 Hz and optionally 15-50 Hz.

The cooling medium may for example be air or an oil; the oil is suitablyphysiologically acceptable as, for example, in the case of medium chaintriglycerides e.g. Miglyol 810N. The cooling medium may be at a coolingtemperature often of less than 15° C., for example of less than 10° C.but above 0° C. In some embodiments the cooling temperature is 8-10° C.The nozzle size (diameter) is typically from 0.5 to 7.5 mm, e.g. from0.5 to 5 mm and optionally from 0.5 to 4 mm. In some embodiments, thenozzle diameter is from 1 to 5 mm for example from 2 to 5 mm, andoptionally from 3 to 4 mm, and in particular may be 3.4 mm.

The flow rate through a 3.4 mm nozzle is 5 to 35 g/min and optionally 10to 20 g/min and for nozzles of different sizes may be adjusted suitablyfor the nozzle area.

(D) Exemplary Processing of Beads

Cooled beads are recovered, for example they may be recovered fromcooling oil after a residence time of 15-60 minutes, for example afterapproximately 30 minutes. Beads recovered from a cooling liquid (e.g.oil) may be centrifuged to eliminate excess cooling liquid, and thendried. Suitably, drying is carried out at room temperature, for examplefrom 15-25° C. and optionally from 20-25° C. The drying may be performedin a drum drier, for example for a period from 6 to 24 hours, e.g. ofabout 12 hours in the case of beads dried at room temperature. The driedbeads may be washed, suitably with a volatile non-aqueous liquid atleast partially miscible with water, e.g. they may be washed with ethylacetate. The washed beads may be dried at room temperature, for examplefrom 15-25° C. and optionally from 20-25° C. The drying may be performedin a drum drier, for example for a period from 6 to 48 hours, e.g. ofabout 24 hours in the case of beads dried at room temperature. Dryingmay be achieved by any suitable means, for example using a drum dryer,suitably under vacuum; or by simply passing warm air through the batchof beads, or by fluidising the beads in a suitable equipment with warmair, for example if a fluid bed dryer. Following drying, the beads arepassed through a 1 to 10 mm, optionally 2 to 5 mm to remove oversizedbeads and then through a sieve with a pore size of 0.5 to 9 mmoptionally 1 to 4 mm to remove undersized beads.

It can be appreciated that it is possible to recycle the beads that arerejected by the sieving process.

As a further aspect of the invention there is provided a formulationobtainable by (having the characteristic of) any of the processesdescribed herein. It is to be understood that the processes describedherein may therefore be used to provide any of the specific coresdescribed in embodiments herein by dispersing the appropriate componentswhich form the disperse phase of the core in the appropriate componentswhich form the aqueous continuous matrix phase of the core.

The preceding paragraphs describe the formation of uncoated corescomprising a pharmaceutically active ingredient in for example ahydrogel-forming polymer matrix. The cores are suitably coated toprovide the formulation according to the invention. The cores may befirst coated with a subcoat and and then further coated with a secondcoating (also referred to as a modified release coating). Suitable subcoats and modified release coatings are any of those described hereinand any of the first coating (for the subcoat) or the second coating(for the modified release coating). Optionally the formulation isfurther coated with an optional outer protective coating as describedherein The coating(s) may be applied using well known methods, forexample spray coating as described below to give the desired sub coatand modified release coating weight gains.

With regard to one of the methods described above (ejection of emulsionthrough an optionally vibrating nozzle) with two concentric orifices(centre and outer), the outer fluid may form a coating (outside thebead) as described herein. The Spherex machine manufactured by Freund(see U.S. Pat. No. 5,882,680 to Freund) is preferably used (the entirecontents of this patent is incorporated herein by reference). Othersimilar ejection or extrusion apparatus may also be used, for examplethe ejection apparatus described hereinbefore.

Use of the Spherex machine achieves very high monodispersity. Forexample, in a typical 100 g, batch 97 g of beads were between 1.4 to 2mm diameter or between 1 and 2 mm. Desired size ranges can be achievedby methods known in the art for rejecting/screening different sizedparticles. For example, it is possible to reject/screen out thelarger/smaller beads by passing a batch first through e.g. a 2 mm meshand subsequently through a 1.4 mm mesh.

The 1.4 to 2 mm diameter range is a good size if it is desired to spraycoat the beads (if smaller, the spray of the coating machine may bypassthe bead; if too large, the beads may be harder to fluidise, which isnecessary to achieve consistent coating).

Coating Process

The coating process can be carried out by any suitable means such as,for example, by use of a coating machine which applies a solution of apolymer coat (as described above in particular) to the formulation.Polymers for coating are either provided by the manufacturer inready-made solutions for direct use or can be made up before usefollowing manufacturers' instructions.

Coating is suitably carried out using a fluid bed coating system such asa Wurster column to apply the coating(s) to the cores. Appropriatecoating machines are known to persons skilled in the art and include,for example, a perforated pan or fluidized-based system for example theGLATT, Vector (e.g. CF 360 EX), ACCELACOTA, Diosna, O'Hara and/orHICOATER processing equipment. To be mentioned is the MFL/01 Fluid BedCoater (Freund) used in the “Bottom Spray” configuration.

Typical coating conditions are as follows:

Process Parameter Values Fluidising airflow (m3/h) 20-60 (preferably30-60) Inlet air temperature (° C.) 20-65 Exhaust air temperature (° C.)20-42 Product temperature (° C.) 20-45 (preferably 40 to 42) Atomizingair pressure (bar) Up to 1.4 e.g. 0.8-1.2 Spray rate (g/min) 2-10 and3-25 RPM

Suitably the coating is applied as a solution or dispersion of thepolymers (and other components) of the coating. Generally the coatingsare applied as an aqueous, solution of dispersion, although othersolvent systems may be used if required. The coating dispersion isapplied to the cored as a spray in the fluid bed coater to give therequired coating weight gain. Generally the coating process is carriedout at a temperature which maintains the cores at a temperature of from35 to 45° C., preferably 40 to 42° C.

After applying the coating, the formulation may be dried, for example bydrying at 40 to 45° C.

The invention further provides a product having the characteristics of aformulation obtained as described herein, a product defined in terms ofits characteristics being defined by the characteristics of theformulation to the exclusion of the method by which it was made.

As mentioned herein the processes described may be used to provide anyof the formulations described in the various embodiments herein. By wayof example there is provided a formulation of the invention comprising acore and a coating comprising a water-soluble cellulose ether or a watersoluble derivative of a cellulose ether wherein the core comprises ahydrogel-forming polymer matrix comprising gelatin, cyclosporin A oranother hydrophobic active ingredient, medium chain mono-di- and/ortri-glycerides, a co-solvent and surfactant, the core having thecharacteristics of a core obtained by the process comprising steps (i)to (vi) described above for forming the core, wherein the aqueous phasepre-mix in step (i) of the process comprises gelatin and surfactant(suitably an anionic surfactant), and the oil phase pre-mix in step (ii)of the process comprises medium chain mono-di- or tri-glycerides,hydrophobic active ingredient, surfactant (suitably a non-ionicsurfactant) and cosolvent; and the wherein the core is optionally coatedwith a coating comprising a water-soluble cellulose ether or a watersoluble derivative of a cellulose ether and the thus-coated core isoptionally coated with a second coating; wherein the coatings are any ofthose described herein. Accordingly, the process may produce aformulation as described above comprising a first coating. The processmay additionally produce a formulation comprising a first coating and asecond coating being outside the first coating.

In addition the process to form a formulation of the invention maycomprise the steps of mixing a first population and a second population,wherein

the first population has a coating that is or comprises a water-solublecellulose ether but having no outer coating, e.g. as described herein;and

the second population has a first coating that is or comprises awater-soluble cellulose ether and a second coating that is or comprisesa delayed release coating, for example as described herein e.g. acoating that is or comprises a delayed release polymer.

In the cores described herein to which the following characteristics areapplicable, e.g. in the immediately preceding paragraph, the followingcharacteristics may be present:

gelatin may be present in an amount of in an amount of 300 to 700 mg/g;

the medium chain mono-, di- or tri-glycerides (for examplecaprylic/capric triglyceride) may be present in an amount of 20 to 200mg/g;

co-solvent (for example 2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol) may be present in anamount of 150 to 250 mg/g;

non-ionic surfactant (for example sorbitan-based surfactants, PEG-fattyacids, or glyceryl fatty acids or poloxamers or particularly apolyethoxylated castor oil for example Kolliphor EL) may be present inan amount of 80 to 200 mg/g;

anionic surfactant (for example, alkyl sulphates, carboxylates orphospholipids (particularly SDS)) may be present in an amount of 15 to50 mg/g; and

active ingredient, particularly cyclosporin A, may be present in anamount of from 60 to 180 mg/g, suitably 60 to 150 mg/g or 80 to 100mg/g, for example 81 to 98 mg/g; wherein all weights are based upon thedry weight of the core before coating.

The core is coated with a first coating (sub-coating) which is orcomprises a water-soluble compound selected from cellulose ethers andtheir derivatives, particularly hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose; the firstcoating being present in an amount corresponding to a weight gain due tothe first coating in a range selected from: (i) from 8% to 12%, forexample about 10%; or (ii) from 4% to 6%, for example about 5% or (iii)about 6% to about 10%, for example about 7%, about 7.5%, about 8%, about8.5%, about 9% or about 9.5% by weight based upon the weight of the coreprior to applying the first coating. The first coating may have amodified release coating (or second coating) applied to it.

Preferably, any modified release coating, especially in the embodimentsof the immediately preceding paragraphs, is or comprises a pHindependent modified release coating, more especially the second coatingmay be a modified release coating comprising ethyl cellulose (e.g.Surelease) still more particularly a modified release coating comprisingethyl cellulose and a water-soluble polysaccharide, pectin (e.g. aSurelease-pectin coating as described herein); and wherein the modifiedrelease coating is present in an amount corresponding to a weight gainof the formulation due to the second coating selected from (a) from 10%to 12%, for example about 11% or about 11.5%; or (b) from 16% to 18%,for example about 17% or (c) from about 8% to about 12%, for exampleabout 8.5%, about 9%, about 9.5%, about 10%, about 10.5% or about 11% byweight based upon the weight of the formulation prior to applying thesecond coating.

Applications

The formulations of the invention may advantageously be used for oraldelivery pharmaceutically active ingredients by virtue of the enhanceddissolution profiles achieved.

The formulations of the invention include modified release formulationswhich comprise cyclosporin A as an active ingredient and a modifiedrelease coating, for example comprising a pH independent polymer, totarget cyclosporin release to the lower intestine. Such formulationsresult in low systemic exposure to cyclosporin A, whilst providing highlevels of cyclosporin A in the lower GI tract, particularly in thecolon. Such formulations release the cyclosporin A in an active form forexample as a solution, which provides enhanced absorption of cyclosporinA in the local tissue of the lower GI tract. When the formulation isused in the form of minibeads, the minibeads are advantageouslydispersed along large sections of the GI tract following oraladministration and are therefore expected provide a more uniformexposure to cyclosporin to large sections of for example the colon.Needless to say, the invention includes such formulations in which thecyclosporin A is replaced by, or supplemented by, another activeingredient for local treatment of the lower GI tract, e.g. colon. Theother active ingredient may be another immunosuppressant or ahydroxylase inhibitor, e.g. DMOG or hydralazine, or it may be acombination of active ingredients comprising at least one mentioned inthis sentence. Tacrolimus and sirolimus are examples of otherimmunosuppressants.

Accordingly the modified release formulations according to the inventioncomprising an active ingredient for local treatment of the lower GItract are expected to be useful in the treatment or prevention of acondition of the GIT. In particular the formulation of the invention maycomprise cyclosporin A and/or another immunosuppressant and be useful inthe prevention or treatment of inflammatory conditions affecting thelower GI tract, particularly conditions affecting the colon.

The formulation of the invention is administered orally. The doserequired will vary depending upon the specific condition being treatedand the stage of the condition. In the case of formulations containingcyclosporin A, the formulation will generally be administered to providea dose of cyclosporin A of from 0.1 to 100 mg, for example a dose of 1to 500 mg or particularly a dose of 25 to 250 mg cyclosporin A, forexample a dose of 37.5 mg, 75 mg or 150 mg. The formulation is suitablyadministered as a single daily dose. Optionally the composition may beadministered twice per day, for example 37.5 mg, 75 mg or 150 mg twiceper day.

In one aspect of the invention there is provided a formulation of theinvention that comprises an immunosuppressant as active ingredient andis for use in the treatment or prophylaxis of an inflammatory boweldisease, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, graft-versus-host disease,gastrointestinal graft-versus-host disease, myasthenia gravis, irritablebowel syndrome (e.g. with constipation, diarrhea and/or pain symptoms),celiac disease, stomach ulcers, diverticulitis, pouchitis, proctitis,mucositis, chemotherapy-associated enteritis, radiation-associatedenteritis, short bowel disease, or chronic diarrhea, gastroenteritis,duodenitis, jejunitis, peptic ulcer, Curling's ulcer, appendicitis,colitis, diverticulosis, endometriosis, colorectal carcinoma,adenocarcinoma, inflammatory disorders such as diversion colitis,ischemic colitis, infectious colitis, chemical colitis, microscopiccolitis (including collagenous colitis and lymphocytic colitis),atypical colitis, pseudomembraneous colitis, fulminant colitis, autisticenterocolitis, interdeminate colitis, jejunoiletis, ileitis, ileocolitisor granulomatous colitis, the prevention of rejection following bonemarrow transplantation, psoriasis, atopic dermatitis, rheumatoidarthritis, or nephrotic syndrome, primary sclerosing cholangitis,familial adenomatous polyposis, or perinanal Crohn's, including perianalfistulae.

In one embodiment the formulation of the invention that comprises animmunosuppressant as active ingredient is for use in the treatment of aninflammatory bowel disease. The main forms of inflammatory bowel diseaseare Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis. Accordingly the formulationof the invention may be useful in the treatment of both of theseconditions.

Crohn's disease may affect the entire GI tract including the colon.However, ulcerative colitis is a condition which affects only the colonand the rectum. Accordingly, the release profile provided by thecolon-targeted, immunosuppressant-containing (e.g. cyclosporinA-containing), formulation according to the invention is expected to beespecially beneficial in the treatment of ulcerative colitis.

In one aspect of the invention there is provided a formulation of theinvention that comprises an immunosuppressant as active ingredient andis for use in the treatment or prophylaxis of a condition of the GIT,for example an inflammatory condition of the GIT, optionally wherein thecondition of the GIT is selected from of irritable bowel syndrome celiacdisease, stomach ulcers, diverticulitis, pouchitis, proctitis,mucositis, radiation-associated enteritis, short bowel disease, orchronic diarrhea, gastroenteritis, duodenitis, jejunitis, peptic ulcer,Curling's ulcer, appendicitis, colitis, diverticulosis, endometriosis,colorectal carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, inflammatory disorders such asdiversion colitis, ischemic colitis, infectious colitis, chemicalcolitis, microscopic colitis (including collagenous colitis andlymphocytic colitis), atypical colitis, pseudomembraneous colitis,fulminant colitis, autistic enterocolitis, interdeminate colitis,jejunoiletis, ileitis, ileocolitis, granulomatous colitis, fibrosis,graft-versus-host disease, gastrointestinal graft-versus-host disease,or HIV or enteropathies.

The colon-targeted, immunosuppressant-containing formulation of theinvention primarily releases immunosuppressant, e.g. cyclosporin A, inthe colon. However, drug may also be released higher in the GI tract andaccordingly the formulation may also provide therapeutic benefit inconditions which affect other parts of the lower GI tract.

Gastrointestinal Graft-Versus-Host-Disease (GI-GVHD) is alife-threatening condition and one of the most common causes for bonemarrow and stem cell transplant failure. In patients with GI-GVHD it isthe donor cells that begin to attack the patient's body—most frequentlythe gut, liver and skin. Patients with mild-to-moderate GI-GVHDtypically develop symptoms of anorexia, nausea, vomiting and diarrhoea.If left untreated, GI-GVHD can progress to ulcerations in the lining ofthe GI tract, and in its most severe form, can be fatal. Accordingly, inone embodiment the immunosuppressant-containing formulation is for usein the treatment or prophylaxis of GastrointestinalGraft-Versus-Host-Disease (GI-GVHD).

In a further embodiment there is provided animmunosuppressant-containing formulation of the invention for use in thetreatment of celiac disease.

In one embodiment the formulation of the invention that comprises animmunosuppressant as active ingredient is for use in the treatment ofneurodegenerative diseases (for example Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer'sdisease or vascular dementia) or paediatric diseases, including, but notlimited to ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease and GvHD.

The coating containing the water-soluble cellulose ether of the presentinvention may be useful in reducing the variability between releaseprofiles of different batches of minibeads. The first coating beingbeneath the second coating has been shown (see FIG. 10) to produce beadswith similar (±5% release) % release of the active ingredient at timepoints in a release profile. This has the beneficial effect of improvingconsistency in in-vitro release profiles but also in in-vivo dissolutionand consequently consistent release of the active along thegastrointestinal tract.

A “batch” is a specific quantity of a drug or other material that isintended to have uniform character and quality, within specified limits,and is produced according to a single manufacturing order during thesame cycle of manufacture. A “lot” means a batch, or a specificidentified portion of a batch, having uniform character and qualitywithin specified limits; or, in the case of a drug product produced bycontinuous process, it is a specific identified amount produced in aunit of time or quantity in a manner that assures its having uniformcharacter and quality within specified limits. “Lot number”, “controlnumber”, or “batch number” means any distinctive combination of letters,numbers, or symbols, or any combination of them, from which the completehistory of the manufacture, processing, packing, holding, anddistribution of a batch or lot of drug product or other material can bedetermined.”

EXAMPLES Example 1: Preparation of a Minibead with a HydroxypropylMethylcellulose Coating

The minibead was generally prepared by forming a core according to thefollowing procedure and then coating the core with a dispersion ofOpadry White 20A28380 (supplied by Colorcon).

Core Manufacture

The cores in the form of seamless minibeads were prepared using Spherexprocess as follows.

An aqueous phase was prepared by mixing sodium dodecyl sulphate (SDS)and D-sorbitol with purified water under constant stirring. Gelatin wasthen added to this solution and gentle heat was applied to approximately60-70° C. to achieve complete melting of gelatin.

An oil phase was prepared by mixing together 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol(Transcutol HP), polyethoxylated castor oil (Kolliphor EL) andcapric/caprylic triglyceride (Miglyol 810) with stirring at roomtemperature to form a solution. Ciclosporin A was added and mixed untila clear solution was obtained. The oil phase was mixed with the heatedaqueous phase in a ratio of approximately 1:7 (oil phase:aqueous phase).The resulting mixture was stirred at 60-70° C. to achieve homogeneity.

The resulting mixture was then fed (via temperature controlled tubing)through a vibrating nozzle, with a single nozzle outlet with a diameterof 3 mm. Seamless minibeads were formed as the solution flowed throughthe vibrating nozzle into a cooling chamber of constantly flowing mediumchain triglyceride (Miglyol 810) cooling oil at a temperature of 10° C.

The minibeads were removed from the cooling oil and placed in acentrifuge to remove the excess oil. Following centrifugation, a firstdrying step was initiated with a set refrigerator temperature of 10° C.and the heater temperature of 20° C. The dryer was rotated at 15 RPM.When the beads were observed to be freely rotating in the drying drum,they were considered to be dry.

The minibeads were washed with ethyl acetate and then dried for afurther 24 h under the same drying conditions as those mentioned abovein the first drying step. The dried minibeads were then sieved to removeoversize and undersize beads resulting in cores 1 mm-2 mm in diameter.This procedure provided cores with the composition shown in Table 1, thevalues being the weight percent of the total weight for each component.

TABLE 1 Component w/w % Cyclosporin A 10.8 Miglyol 810 N 4.6 TranscutolHP 16.4 Kolliphor EL 9.2 SDS 4.0 Sorbitol 5.7 Gelatin 49.3

Coating the Core

The minibead cores were loaded into a fluid bed coater (Wurster column)and coated with Opadry White 20A28380 (supplied by Colorcon Limited) asa dispersion. The processing parameters, such as inlet air temperatureand inlet air volume, were adjusted to keep the minibead temperaturebetween 40° C. and 42° C. until the required coating weight gain wasreached. The resulting subcoated minibeads were dried for 5 minutes at40° C. in the coater.

Composition of the Minibead

A minibead with the composition shown in Table 2 below was produced bythe above procedure. The minibead has an Opadry weight gain of 2.7%relative to the weight of the core.

TABLE 2 Component w/w % Cyclosporin A 10.5 Miglyol 810 N 4.5 TranscutolHP 16.0 Kolliphor EL 9.0 SDS 3.9 Sorbitol 5.5 Gelatin 48.0 Opadry 2.6

Example 2: Preparation of Minibeads with a Hydroxypropyl MethylcelluloseCoating

Following the procedure described in Example 1, minibeads coated withhydroxypropyl methylcellulose with the differing % weight gains ofOpadry were produced. The % weight gain of Opadry are shown in Table 3below.

TABLE 3 % weight gain of Opadry Example 2a 6.3%  Example 2b 10% Example2c 15%

The minibeads of Examples 2a-c had the composition shown in Table 4.

TABLE 4 Example 2a Example 2b Example 2c Component w/w % Cyclosporin A10.2 9.8 9.4 Miglyol 810 N 4.3 4.2 4.0 Transcutol HP 15.5 14.9 14.3Kolliphor EL 8.7 8.4 8.0 SDS 3.8 3.6 3.5 Sorbitol 5.3 5.2 5.0 Gelatin46.3 44.8 42.8 Opadry 5.9 9.1 13.0

Example 3: In-Vitro Dissolution Profile of Minibeads of Examples 1, 2a,2b and 2c Up to 4 Hours

The in-vitro dissolution profiles of a sample of the minibeads producedin Examples 1, 2a, 2b and 2c were measured in water. As a referenceexample, the dissolution profile of the core with no Opadry coatingproduced in Example 1 was tested. The dissolution testing was carriedout in accordance with USP <711> Dissolution using Apparatus II (paddleapparatus) operated with a paddle speed of 75 rpm and with thedissolution medium at a temperature of 37° C.±5° C.

Aliquots of the medium were taken for analysis at 1 hour, 2 hours and 4hours for all of the test media. In addition to these time points,aliquots were also taken at the following time points for the indicatedminibeads:

-   -   minibeads of Examples 1 and 2a-20 mins, 40 mins and 1.5 hours;    -   minibeads of Examples 2b, 2c and the non-coated core of Example        1-30 mins.

The aliquots were analysed for cyclosporin A using Reverse Phase HPLCwith UV detection at 210 nm.

The amount of dissolved cyclosporin A in the dissolution medium isexpressed as a percentage based upon the original cyclosporin content inthe test formulation (the released). The % release values provide arelease profile when plotted against time and the release profile foreach of the samples of minibeads from Examples 1, 2a, 2b, 2c and thenon-coated core of Example 1 is shown in FIG. 1.

The release profiles of the tested minibeads clearly show that anadditional subcoat of hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (Opadry) enhancesthe dissolution of the active ingredient within the first 2 hours of thedissolution test. All of the minibeads with a coating of hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (HPMC) released cyclosporine into solution much morerapidly than the non-coated core of Example 1. This is surprising andcounterintuitive. Common sense suggests that adding additional materialonto the core, which coating the core with HPMC does, should increasethe time in which it takes to release the active into solution.

Example 4: In-Vitro Dissolution Profile of Minibeads of Examples 1, 2a,2b and 2c Up to 24 Hours

Following the same protocol as that described in Example 3 a dissolutionprofile of minibeads of Examples 1, 2a, 2b, 2c and the non-coated coreof Example 1 over 24 hours was generated.

In addition to the aliquot samples taken at the time points mentioned inExample 3 each of the dissolution tests were also sampled at 6 hours, 12hours, 18 hours and 24 hours. Every sample taken from the dissolutiontests were analysed for cyclosporin A using Reverse Phase HPLC with UVdetection at 210 nm.

As in Example 3 a graph of the release profile of each dissolution testwas generated and the release profiles are shown in FIG. 2.

It is evident from the release profiles of FIG. 2 that the presence of aHPMC coating significantly improves the cyclosporin release whencompared to a non-coated core. Not only is there a more rapid release ofthe cyclosporin within the first 2 hours but the presence of a HPMCcoating also maintains the cyclosporin in solution in the waterdissolution medium.

Example 5: Preparation of a Minibead with a First Coating ofHydroxypropyl Methylcellulose and a Second Coating ofEthylcellulose/Pectin

A core was produced and subsequently coated with Opadry, the firstcoating (also referred to as a subcoat), following the procedure inExample 1. The minibead produced by the procedure of Example 1 was thenfurther coated with a second coating (also referred to as an overcoat)of a mixture of Surelease® (an ethylcellulose dispersion) and Pectin.

The Surelease®/pectin overcoat was applied by the following procedure.Pectin was added to purified water in a stainless steel vessel and mixedto obtain a solution. Surelease® was slowly added to the vessel whilstmaintaining mixing to provide the required Pectin concentration in theSurelease® for the overcoat. The resulting coating suspension was thenapplied onto the surface of the sub-coated minibeads using an analogouscoating method to that described for the Opadry coating in Example 1until the desired weight gain of Surelease®/Pectin was reached. Theover-coated minibeads were then dried in the coater for an hour at40-45° C.

A number of minibeads with differing levels of Opadry and differinglevels of Surelease®/Pectin were produced. Table 5 shows the % weightgain of Opadry and the % weight gain of Surelease®/Pectin of theminibeads that were produced.

TABLE 5 % weight gain of % weight gain of Opadry Surelease/PectinExample 5a N/A   9% Example 5b  2.7%  11% Example 5c  6.3%  11% Example5d  10%  11% Example 5e N/A   5% Example 5f  2.6%  4.6% Example 5g 11.9% 5.4% Example 5h N/A 21.3% Example 5i 10.6% 23.3% Example 5j 15.5% 23.1%

Examples 5a, 5e and 5h have no Opadry coating. They are produced bycoating a core described in Example 1 with Surelease®/Pectin asdescribed above.

The minibeads of Examples 5a-j have the compositions shown in Table 6.

TABLE 6 Example Example Example Example Example Example Example 5a 5d 5c5b 5h 5i 5j Component w/w % Cyclosporin A 9.9 8.8 9.2 9.5 8.9 7.9 7.6Miglyol 810 N 4.2 3.8 3.9 4.0 3.8 3.4 3.2 Transcutol HP 15.1 13.4 13.914.4 13.5 12.0 11.5 Kolliphor EL 8.4 7.6 7.8 8.1 7.6 6.8 6.5 SDS 3.7 3.33.4 3.5 3.3 3.0 2.8 Sorbitol 5.2 4.7 4.8 5.0 4.7 4.2 4.0 Gelatin 45.240.3 41.8 43.2 40.6 36.1 34.6 Opadry N/A 8.2 5.3 2.4 N/A 7.8 10.9Surelease (solid 8.1 9.7 9.7 9.7 17.2 18.4 18.5 contents) Pectin 0.2 0.20.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.4 Example Example Example 5e 5f 5g Component w/w %Cyclosporin A 10.3 10.1 9.2 Miglyol 810 N 4.4 4.3 3.9 Transcutol HP 15.615.3 13.9 Kolliphor EL 8.8 8.6 7.8 SDS 3.8 3.7 3.4 Sorbitol 5.4 5.3 4.8Gelatin 46.9 45.9 41.8 Opadry N/A 2.4 10.1 Surelease (solid 4.7 4.3 5.0contents) Pectin 0.1 0.1 0.1

Example 6: In-Vitro Dissolution Profile of Minibeads of Examples 5a-d

The in-vitro dissolution profiles of a sample of the minibeads producedin Examples 5a-d were measured using the following two stage dissolutiontest. The dissolution testing was carried out in accordance with USP<711> Dissolution using Apparatus II (paddle apparatus) operated with apaddle speed of 75 rpm and with the dissolution medium at a temperatureof 37° C.±0.5° C. In the first stage of the test the dissolution mediumwas 750 ml of 0.1N HCl simulating the pH of the gastric environment. Atthe start of the test (t=0) the sample was placed in the dissolutionmedium. After 2 hours an aliquot of the medium is taken for subsequentanalysis and immediately (suitably within 5 minutes) the second stage ofthe dissolution test is initiated. In the second stage 250 ml of 0.2Mtribasic sodium phosphate containing 2% sodium dodecyl sulphate (SDS) isadded to the dissolution medium and the pH adjusted to 6.8±0.05 using 2NNaOH or 2N HCl as required.

Samples of the dissolution medium were taken at the following timepoints during the second stage of the test: 4 hours; 6 hours; 12 hours;and 24 hours from the start of the test (i.e. from t=0 at the start ofthe first stage).

The sample taken at the end of the first stage (2 hours) and the samplesfrom the second stage were analysed for cyclosporin A using ReversePhase HPLC with UV detection at 210 nm.

The amount of dissolved cyclosporin A in the dissolution medium isexpressed as a percentage based upon the original cyclosporin content inthe test formulation (the % released). The % release values provide arelease profile when plotted against time and the release profile foreach of the samples of minibeads from Examples 5a-d are shown in FIG. 3.

It is readily apparent from the release profiles in FIG. 3 that thepresence of a HPMC subcoat enhances the release profile compared to thenon-subcoated minibead of Example 5a. The minibeads comprising a HPMCsubcoat give a higher % release of cyclosporin from the minibeads thanthe non-subcoated minibeads. The same relationship between the % releaseof cyclosporin from subcoated and non-subcoated minibeads can be seen inthe release profiles of FIG. 4.

Example 7: In-Vitro Dissolution Profile of Minibeads of Examples 5e-g

Following the procedure described in Example 6 a release profile foreach of the minibeads of Examples 5e-g was generated. These releaseprofiles are shown in FIG. 4. FIG. 4 shows that the effect observed inFIG. 3 also occurs when a subcoated bead with a lower level ofSurelease/Pectin is used.

Example 8: In-Vitro Dissolution Profile of Minibeads of Examples 5h-j

Following the procedure described in Example 6 a release profile foreach of the minibeads of Examples 5h-j was generated. These releaseprofiles are shown in FIG. 5. FIG. 5 shows that the effect observed inFIGS. 3 and 4 also occurs when a subcoated bead with a higher level ofSurelease/Pectin is used.

Example 9: Preparation of Further Minibeads with a First Coating ofHydroxypropyl Methylcellulose and a Second Coating ofEthylcellulose/Pectin

Example 5 describes the use of Opadry White to provide thehydroxylpropyl methylcellulose subcoat. We now describe the productionof further minibeads with a first coating of hydroxypropylmethylcellulose and a second coating of ethylcellulose/pectin usingMethocel E5 (supplied by Colorcon Limited) as the hydroxypropylmethylcellulose.

Minibeads were produced in the same way as in Example 5, except MethocelE5 was used instead of Opadry White for the first coating (subcoat).

A number of minibeads with differing levels of Methocel E5 and differinglevels of Surelease®/Pectin were produced. Table 7 shows the % weightgain of Methocel E5 and the % weight gain of Surelease®/Pectin of theminibeads that were produced.

TABLE 7 % weight gain of % weight gain of Methocel E5 Surelease/PectinExample 9a N/A  9% Example 9b   3% 11% Example 9c 5.3% 11%

Example 9a has no Methocel E5 coating. It is produced by coating a coredescribed in Example 1 with Surelease®/Pectin as described above.

The minibeads of Examples 9a-c have the compositions shown in Table 8.

TABLE 8 Example Example Example 9a 9b 9c Component w/w % Cyclosporin A9.9 9.4 9.2 Miglyol 810 N 4.2 4.0 4.0 Transcutol HP 15.1  14.4 14.1Kolliphor EL 8.4 8.1 7.9 SDS 3.7 3.5 3.4 Sorbitol 5.2 5.0 4.9 Gelatin45.2  43.1 42.1 Methocel E5 N/A 2.6 4.5 Surelease (solid 8.1 9.7 9.7contents) Pectin 0.2 0.2 0.2

Example 10: In-Vitro Dissolution Profile of Minibeads of Examples 9a-c

The in-vitro dissolution profiles of a sample of the minibeads producedin Examples 9a-c were measured using the dissolution test methoddescribed in Example 6. The release profile for each of the minibeads ofExamples 9a-c is shown in FIG. 6.

FIG. 6 shows that the same result is obtained when Methocel is used asthe subcoat as when Opadry is used as the subcoat.

Example 11: Comparison of In-Vitro Dissolution Profiles of Examples 5a-dand Examples 9b-c

FIG. 7 shows the release profile of each of Examples 5a-d and 9b-c. Asmentioned above, FIG. 6 shows the same effect is seen with Methocelsubcoated minibeads as Opadry subcoated minibeads. In addition, when therelease profiles generated by the Methocel subcoated minibeads areplotted against the release profile of Opadry subcoated beads, as inFIG. 7, it can be seen that the Methocel subcoated minibeads and theOpadry subcoated minibeads give closely matching release profiles.

Example 12: Preparation of Mesalamine Containing Minibeads with a FirstCoating of Hydroxypropyl Methylcellulose and a Second Coating ofEthylcellulose/Pectin

Minibeads containing mesalamine were prepared as described in Example 5except that the cores were not produced by passing the mixture through avibrating nozzle but they were produced by hand. In addition cyclosporinwas replaced by mesalamine and the oil phase formed during the processto make the core (described in Example 1) did not form a solution; themesalamine remained as a suspension.

By following this procedure a three populations of minibeads withdiffering levels of Opadry and differing levels of Surelease®/Pectinwere produced. Table 9 shows the % weight gain of Opadry and the %weight gain of Surelease®/Pectin of the minibeads that were produced.

TABLE 9 % weight gain of % weight gain of Opadry Surelease/PectinExample 12a N/A 10.5% Example 12b  5%   12% Example 12c 12% 11.5%

Example 12a has no Opadry coating. It is produced by coating a coredescribed in Example 1 with Surelease®/Pectin as described above.

The minibeads of Examples 12a-c have the compositions shown in Table 10.

TABLE 10 Example Example Example 12a 12b 12c Component w/w % Mesalamine9.0 8.4 7.9 Miglyol 810 N 4.7 4.4 4.2 Transcutol HP 13.7  12.9 12.1Kolliphor EL 7.5 7.0 6.6 SDS 3.5 3.3 3.1 Sorbitol 5.0 4.7 4.4 Gelatin47.2  44.4 41.8 Opadry N/A 4.3 9.6 Surelease (solid 9.2 10.4 10.1contents) Pectin 0.2 0.2 0.2

Example 13: In-Vitro Dissolution Profile of Minibeads of Examples 12a-c

The in-vitro dissolution profiles of a sample of the minibeads producedin Examples 12a-c were measured using the dissolution test describedbelow:0.05M pH 7.5 phosphate buffer prepared by dissolving 6.8 g ofmonobasic potassium phosphate and 1 g of sodium hydroxide in water tomake 1000 mL of solution, and adjusting with 10N sodium hydroxide to apH of 7.5±0.05; 900 mL are used.

USP Apparatus 2 with a paddle speed of 75 RPM.Dissolution medium temperature: 37° C.±0.5° C.The release profile for each of the minibeads of Examples 12a-c is shownin FIG. 8.

Example 14: Preparation of Hydralazine HCl Containing Minibeads with aFirst Coating of Hydroxypropyl Methylcellulose and a Second Coating ofEthylcellulose/Pectin

The coated minibeads containing hydralazine HCl were produced by coatinga core comprising the hydralazine HCl. Hydralazine HCl is a hydrophilicAPI, its solubility in water is approximately 8 g/L (i.e. 0.8%);however, it has been found that the API was fully soluble in the aqueousphase of the formulation when heated at 60-70° C.

Core Manufacture

The cores in the form of seamless minibeads were prepared manually asfollows.

The aqueous phase was prepared by adding sodium dodecyl sulphate (SDS)and D-sorbitol to purified water under constant stirring until asolution was obtained. Hydralazine HCl and Gelatin were then added tothis solution and gentle heat was applied to approximately 60-70° C. toachieve complete melting of gelatin. Stirring was continued until aclear solution was obtained.

The composition of the aqueous phase is shown in Table 11.

TABLE 11 Component % w/w Hydralazine HCl 3.5 Gelatin 18.4 Sorbitol 2.0SDS 1.3 Purified Water 74.7

An oil phase was prepared by mixing together 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol(Transcutol HP), polyethoxylated castor oil (Kolliphor EL) andcapric/caprylic triglyceride (Miglyol 810) with stirring at roomtemperature to form a solution. The composition of the oil phase isgiven in Table 12.

TABLE 12 Component % w/w Transcutol HP 55.0 Kolliphor EL 30.0 Miglyol810 15.0

The oil phase was mixed to form an emulsion with the heated aqueousphase in a ratio of approximately 1:12 (oil phase:aqueous phase). Theresulting mixture was stirred at 60-70° C. to achieve homogeneity. Thecomposition of the emulsion is shown in Table 13

TABLE 13 Component % w/w Hydralazine HCl 3.2 Transcutol HP 4.2 Miglyol810 1.2 Kolliphor EL 2.3 Gelatin 17.0 Sorbitol 1.8 SDS 1.3 Purifiedwater 69.0

The resulting mixture was then manually ejected through an orifice intoa cooling chamber of medium chain triglyceride (Miglyol 810) cooling oilat a temperature of 4-10° C. The minibeads were removed from the coolingoil and dried at room temperature for 24 hours.

The composition of the cores is shown in Table 14.

TABLE 14 Components % w/w Hydralazine HCl 10.4 Transcutol HP 13.7Miglyol 810 N 3.7 Kolliphor EL 7.4 Gelatin 54.8 D-Sorbitol 6.0 SDS 4.0

The cores produced by the procedure described in this example werecoated with Opadry White 20A28380 (supplied by Colorcon) in the same wayas described in Example 1, where appropriate. The cores were directlycoated or the Opadry coated cores, as appropriate, were coated withSurelease/Pectin as described in Example 5. Six populations of minibeadswith differing levels of Opadry and differing levels ofSurelease®/Pectin were produced by following this procedure. Table 15shows the % weight gain of Opadry and the % weight gain ofSurelease®/Pectin of the minibeads that were produced.

TABLE 15 % weight gain of % weight gain of Opadry Surelease/PectinExample 14a N/A   11% Example 14b  6.4% 10.8% Example 14c 11.5% 11.1%Example 14d N/A 17.7% Example 14e  6.4% 17.9% Example 14f 11.5% 16.6%

Examples 14a and 14d have no Opadry coating. These Examples are producedby coating a core described in Example 1 with Surelease®/Pectin asdescribed above.

The minibeads of Examples 14a-f have the compositions shown in Table 16.

TABLE 16 Example Example Example Example Example Example 14a 14b 14c 14d14e 14f Component w/w % Hydralazine 9.4 8.8 8.4 8.8 8.3 8.0 Miglyol 810N 3.4 11.6 11.1 11.7 10.9 10.5 Transcutol HP 12.3 3.1 3.0 3.1 3.0 2.9Kolliphor EL 6.7 6.3 6.0 6.3 5.9 5.7 SDS 3.6 46.5 44.2 46.6 43.7 42.1Sorbitol 5.4 5.1 4.8 5.1 4.8 4.6 Gelatin 49.4 3.4 3.2 3.4 3.2 3.1 OpadryN/A 5.4 9.3 N/A 5.1 8.9 Surelease (solid 9.9 9.8 10.0 15.0 15.1 14.2contents)

Example 15: In-Vitro Dissolution Profile of Minibeads of Examples 14a-f

The in-vitro dissolution profiles of a sample of the minibeads producedin Examples 14a-f were measured using the dissolution test methoddescribed in Example 13. The release profile for each of the minibeadsof Examples 14a-f is shown in FIG. 9.

The release profile of FIG. 9 shows the same effect as that observed inthe previous examples—an increased % release of the active ingredient,hydralazine, from the minibeads with a HPMC subcoat versus non-subcoatedminibeads with comparable levels of Surelease/Pectin. For example, acomparison between non-subcoated Example 14a and subcoated Example 14cshows the higher % release effect of the HPMC subcoat. The same is trueof a comparison between Example 14d and Example 14f.

Example 16: Preparation of Celecoxib Containing Minibeads with a FirstCoating of Hydroxypropyl Methylcellulose and a Second Coating ofEthylcellulose/Pectin

The coated minibeads containing celecoxib were produced by coating acore comprising the celecoxib. Celecoxib is a hydrophobic API.

Core Manufacture

The cores in the form of seamless minibeads were prepared manually asfollows.

The aqueous phase was prepared by adding sodium dodecyl sulphate (SDS)and D-sorbitol to purified water under constant stirring until asolution was obtained. Gelatin was then added to this solution andgentle heat was applied to approximately 60-70° C. to achieve completemelting of gelatin. Stirring was continued until a clear solution wasobtained.

An oil phase was prepared by mixing together macrogol hydroxystearate(Kolliphor HS-15) with celecoxib. The mixture was stirred at roomtemperature to form a solution.

The oil phase was mixed to form an emulsion with the heated aqueousphase in a ratio of approximately 1:3 (oil phase:aqueous phase). Theresulting mixture was stirred at 60-70° C. to achieve homogeneity.

The resulting mixture was then manually ejected through an orifice intoa cooling chamber of medium chain triglyceride (Miglyol 810) cooling oilat a temperature of 10° C. The minibeads were removed from the coolingoil and dried at room temperature for 24 hours.

The cores produced by the procedure described in this example werecoated with Opadry White 20A28380 (supplied by Colorcon) in the same wayas described in Example 1 and then coated with Surelease as described inExample 5. The cores were also directly coated (i.e. in the absence ofan Opadry coat) with Surelease in a similar fashion to that described inExample 5. Table 17 shows the composition of minibeads coated with 27%weight gain Surelease® without a subcoat of Opadry (non-subcoatedminibeads). Table 18 shows the composition of minibeads coated with 10%Opadry subcoat and 27% weight gain Surelease® (subcoated minibeads).

TABLE 17 27% wt. g Surelease formulation (w/o subcoat) Component w/w %Celecoxib 4.8 Kolliphor HS-15 43.0 Gelatin 24.9 SDS 3.3 D-Sorbitol 2.8Surelease 21.2

TABLE 18 27% wt. g Surelease formulation (10% Opadry subcoat) Componentw/w % Celecoxib 4.4 Kolliphor HS-15 39.8 Gelatin 23.1 SDS 3.1 D-Sorbitol2.5 Opadry 7.3 Surelease 19.7

Example 17: In-Vitro Dissolution Profile of Minibeads of Examples 16

The in-vitro dissolution profiles of a sample of the minibeads producedin Example 16 were measured using the dissolution test method describedbelow.

The in-vitro release was measured using a two stage in-vitro dissolutiontest in which a composition is exposed to 0.1 N HCl for two hours tosimulate pH of the gastric environment and is then exposed to pH 6.8 fortwenty two hours (by adding a sufficient quantity of 0.2M tribasicsodium phosphate solution either with or without 0.05% sodium dodecylsulfate (SDS)) to simulate pH in the small intestine and lower GI tract.The in-vitro test using Apparatus II (paddle apparatus) was operatedwith a paddle speed of 75 rpm and with the dissolution medium at atemperature of 37° C.±0.5° C. Aliquots of the medium were taken foranalysis at 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours and 18 hours.The aliquots were analysed for celecoxib using a high performance liquidchromatography (HPLC) method. From the area under the curve (HPLCmethod), the % of drug released at particular time points wascalculated.

Both subcoated and non-subcoated minibeads were tested using thedissolution test described above not containing SDS and subcoatedminibeads were also tested in a using the dissolution test with 0.05%SDS. The release profile for each of the minibeads of Example 16 isshown in FIG. 10.

The release profile of FIG. 10 shows the same effect as that observed inthe previous examples—an increased final % release of the activeingredient, celecoxib, from the minibeads with a HPMC subcoat versusnon-subcoated minibeads with comparable levels of Surelease.

Example 18: In-Vitro Dissolution Profile of Minibeads from DifferentBatches

Minibead cores were prepared according to the procedure described inExample 1. From these cores, 3 populations of minibeads coated with bothan Opadry subcoat and a Surelease/pectin overcoat were produced and 3populations of minibeads with only a Surelease/Pectin coating wereproduced. The 3 populations with both an Opadry subcoat and aSurelease/pectin overcoat had an amount of coating corresponding to a 5%weight gain of Opadry and a 11.5% weight gain of Surelease/Pectin. The 3populations with only a Surelease/pectin coating had an amount ofcoating corresponding to a 9% weight gain of Surelease/Pectin. Thecompositions of the minibeads with an Opadry subcoat and without anOpadry subcoat are shown in Table 19.

TABLE 19 With subcoat W/o subcoat Component (%) (%) Cyclosporin A 9.29.9 Miglyol 810 N 3.9 4.2 Transcutol HP 14.0 15.1  Kolliphor EL 7.9 8.4SDS 3.4 3.7 Sorbitol 4.9 5.2 Gelatin 42.1 45.2  Opadry 4.3 N/A Surelease(solid contents) 10.1 8.1 Pectin 0.2 0.2

The dissolution profile of these 6 populations of minibeads was testedusing the dissolution test protocol of Example 6 to give the dissolutionprofile shown in FIG. 11.

FIG. 11 shows a wide variation in the release profiles for thepopulations of minibeads lacking a HPMC subcoat; % release values at 12hours range from 48% to 63% and at 24 hours they range from 61% to 83%.In stark contrast to the results obtained for the minibeads lacking aHPMC subcoat, the minibeads having a HPMC subcoat have very littlevariation in the % release of the different batches.

Example 19: Measurement of Coating Thickness

A minibead produced according to the procedure disclosed herein wasstudied under a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The minibead had afirst coating of Opadry with a weight gain of 10% and a second coatingof Surelease/Pectin (98:2 ratio) with a weight gain of 11%. The minibeadwas cut in half at the widest point of the minibead. The cross sectionalsurface of the bead was then studied under the SEM. FIG. 12 shows a SEMimage of the cross section of the minibead and FIG. 13 provides amagnified version of the image of FIG. 12. FIG. 13 clearly shows thedistinct first coating and second coating. From the SEM image it waspossible to determine that the thickness of the first coating was 41 μmand the thickness of the second coating was 40 μm.

Example 20: Minibead Compositions

Minibeads having the compositions shown in Table 21 were prepared usingan analogous method to that described in Example 1 under “CoreManufacture” except the oil phase to aqueous phase ratio was 1:5 in thecompositions of Table 21. Mixing of the oil phase and the aqueous phaseresulted in a liquid mixture with the composition shown in Table 20. The“surfactant” of Table 20 was one of the surfactants listed in Table 22.Minibeads with a composition of Table 21 were prepared for all of thesurfactants of Table 22 except for Labrafil M 1944 CS. It is expectedthat minibeads can be formed with a liquid composition comprisingLabrafil M 1944 CS by varying the oil to aqueous phase ratio or byincreasing the viscosity of the liquid composition.

TABLE 20 Component % w/w Cyclosporine 4.1 Transcutol HP 6.2 Surfactant*4.3 Miglyol 810 2.1 Type A Gelatin 14.3 Sorbitol 1.7 SDS 1.1 PurifiedWater 66.2

TABLE 21 Component % w/w Cyclosporine 12.1 Transcutol HP 18.3Surfactant* 12.9 Miglyol 810 6.2 Type A Gelatin 42.3 Sorbitol 5.0 SDS3.2

Table 22 shows the surfactants of the compositions of Table 20 and 21.The table also shows the results of a crystallisation test carried outon the liquid compositions comprising each of the surfactants.

Crystallisation Test

Emulsions were obtained with a composition disclosed in Table 20 foreach of the surfactants listed in Table 22 with stirring at 250-350 rpm.Samples of the emulsion were taken at 30 minute intervals and viewedunder a microscope at 50× or 100× magnification. The time when crystalsappeared in the sample is shown in Table 22.

TABLE 22 Surfactant HLB Crystallization time (h) Span 85* 1.8 3 LabrafilM 1944 CS 4 1 Span 40* 6.7 1.5 Plurol Oleique CC 497 6 1 Labrafil M 2130CS 4 0.5 Cremophor EL 14 0.5

1-2. (canceled)
 3. A pharmaceutical formulation comprising a core, afirst coating and a second coating outside the first coating, whereinthe core comprises a hydrogel forming polymer matrix and apharmaceutically active ingredient comprising cyclosporin A, wherein thefirst coating comprises a water-soluble cellulose ether and the firstcoating has a thickness of from 10 μm to 100 μm, wherein the secondcoating comprises a single polymer, wherein the polymer is a delayedrelease pH independent polymer and the first coating is present in anamount to provide a higher % release of the pharmaceutically activeingredient from the pharmaceutical formulation than a correspondingpharmaceutical formulation without the first coating at 12 hours fromthe start of a dissolution test. 4-113. (canceled)
 114. Thepharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, wherein the first coating has athickness of from 10 μm to 50 μm.
 115. The pharmaceutical formulation ofclaim 3, wherein the first coating is present in an amount correspondingto a weight gain due to the coating of from 1% to 9% by weight of thecore.
 116. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, wherein the firstcoating is present in an amount corresponding to a weight gain due tothe coating of from 8% to 20%.
 117. The pharmaceutical formulation ofclaim 3, wherein the first coating comprising a water-soluble celluloseether is in contact with the core.
 118. The pharmaceutical formulationof claim 3, wherein the second coating is in contact with the firstcoating comprising a water-soluble cellulose ether.
 119. Thepharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, wherein the second coating ispresent in an amount corresponding to a weight gain due to theadditional coating of from 2% to 40%.
 120. The pharmaceuticalformulation of claim 3, wherein the delayed release polymer iswater-soluble or water-permeable in an aqueous medium with a pH greaterthan 6.5.
 121. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, wherein thedelayed release polymer comprises ethyl cellulose.
 122. Thepharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, wherein the water-solublecellulose ether is selected from any one or a combination of: methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxyethylmethylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose.
 123. Thepharmaceutical formulation of claim 122, wherein the water-solublecellulose ether is hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose.
 124. Thepharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, wherein the first coating ispresent in an amount corresponding to a weight gain due to the coatingof from 0.5% to 20% by weight of the core.
 125. The pharmaceuticalformulation of claim 3, wherein the first coating is present in anamount corresponding to a weight gain due to the coating in a rangeselected from: 0.5% to 15%; 1% to 15%; 1% to 12%; 1% to 10%; 1% to 8%;1% to 6%; 1% to 4%, 2% to 10%; 2% to 8%; 2% to 6%; 2% to 4%; 4% to 8%;4% to 7%, 5% to 7%; 7% to 20%; 7% to 16%; 9% to 20%; 9% to 16%; 10% to15%; or 12% to 16%.
 126. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 3,wherein the hydrogel forming polymer matrix comprises a hydrocolloid, anon-hydrocolloid gum or chitosan.
 127. The pharmaceutical formulation ofclaim 3, wherein the hydrogel forming polymer matrix comprises gelatin,agar, a polyethylene glycol, starch, casein, chitosan, soya beanprotein, safflower protein, alginates, gellan gum, carrageenan, xanthangum, phthalated gelatin, succinated gelatin, cellulosephthalate-acetate,oleoresin, polyvinylacetate, polymerisates of acrylic or methacrylicesters and polyvinylacetate-phthalate and any derivative of any of theforegoing; or a mixture of one or more such a hydrogel forming polymer.128. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, wherein the hydrogelforming polymer matrix comprises a hydrocolloid selected fromcarrageenan, gelatin, agar and pectin, or a combination thereof. 129.The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, wherein the hydrogel formingpolymer matrix further comprises a plasticiser.
 130. The pharmaceuticalformulation of claim 3, wherein the hydrogel forming polymer matrixencapsulates the active ingredient.
 131. The pharmaceutical formulationof claim 3, wherein the core is in the form of a solid colloid, thecolloid comprising a continuous phase and a disperse phase, wherein thecontinuous phase comprises the hydrogel forming polymer matrix.
 132. Thepharmaceutical formulation of claim 131, wherein the disperse phasecomprises a hydrophobic phase.
 133. The pharmaceutical formulation ofclaim 131, wherein the disperse phase comprises a liquid lipid.
 134. Thepharmaceutical formulation of claim 131, wherein the disperse phasecomprises a glyceride composition.
 135. The pharmaceutical formulationof claim 131, wherein the disperse phase comprises an oil phase selectedfrom caprylic/capric triglyceride; caprylic/capric/linoleictriglyceride; caprylic/capric/succinic triglyceride; and propyleneglycol dicaprylate/dicaprate.
 136. The pharmaceutical formulation ofclaim 131, wherein the disperse phase comprises an oil phase selectedfrom linoleoyl macrogolglycerides (polyoxylglycerides) andcaprylocaproyl macrogolglycerides.
 137. The pharmaceutical formulationof claim 131, wherein the disperse phase further comprises a solvent,wherein the solvent is miscible with the disperse phase and water. 138.The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 131, wherein the disperse phasecomprises an oil phase which represents 10-85% by dry weight of thecore.
 139. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 131, wherein theactive ingredient is in solution or suspended in the continuous phase orthe disperse phase.
 140. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 139,wherein the active ingredient is: a. in solution in the disperse phase;b. in solution in the continuous phase; c. suspended in the dispersephase; or d. suspended in the continuous phase.
 141. The pharmaceuticalformulation of claim 131, wherein the core further comprises an anionicsurfactant present in at least the continuous phase, the anionicsurfactant having an HLB value of at least
 10. 142. The pharmaceuticalformulation of claim 131, wherein the continuous phase comprises ahydrogel forming polymer matrix and the disperse phase comprises an oilphase comprising an oil wherein the oil has an HLB in the range 0-10.143. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 142, wherein the oil has anHLB of 1-5.
 144. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 142, whereinthe oil phase comprises a triglyceride.
 145. The pharmaceuticalformulation of claim 131, wherein the disperse phase comprises an oilphase selected from caprylic/capric triglyceride;caprylic/capric/linoleic triglyceride; caprylic/capric/succinictriglyceride; and propylene glycol dicaprylate/dicaprate; and apolyethoxylated castor oil.
 146. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim137, wherein the solvent is 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethanol.
 147. Thepharmaceutical formulation of claim 131, wherein the disperse phasecomprises: a pharmaceutically active ingredient comprising cyclosporinA; a medium chain mono- di- or tri-glyceride; and a solvent, and whereinthe continuous phase comprises: an anionic surfactant, a hydrogelforming polymer matrix which comprises a hydrocolloid selected fromcarrageenan, gelatin, agar and pectin, or a combination thereof; andoptionally a plasticiser.
 148. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim3, wherein the core comprises a hydrogel forming polymer comprisinggelatin in an amount of 300 to 700 mg/g, the core further comprisingmedium chain mono, di or tri-glycerides in an amount of 20 to 200 mg/g,and the pharmaceutical formulation further comprises the followingcomponents: co-solvent in an amount of 150 to 250 mg/g; and anionicsurfactant in an amount of 15 to 50 mg/g.
 149. The pharmaceuticalformulation of claim 3, wherein the formulation is in the form of aminibead.
 150. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, wherein thelargest cross sectional dimension of a core is from about 0.01 mm toabout 5 mm.
 151. A pharmaceutical formulation comprising a multiplicityof minibeads of claim
 149. 152. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim3, wherein the formulation is for oral administration.
 153. Thepharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, the core having thecharacteristics of a core formed by mixing a disperse phase with acontinuous phase to form a colloid, wherein the continuous phase is anaqueous phase comprising hydrogel forming polymer and the disperse phaseis a hydrophobic phase, wherein the pharmaceutically active ingredientis in the continuous phase or the disperse phase, wherein the colloid isgelled to form the core.
 154. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim153, wherein the continuous phase further comprises an anionicsurfactant.
 155. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 153, whereinthe core comprises a hydrogel forming polymer matrix and a hydrophobicphase dispersed in the a hydrogel forming polymer matrix, wherein thecore comprises gelatin, SDS, sorbitol, polyethoxylated castor oil,caprylic/capric triglyceride, and 2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol; wherein theaqueous phase comprises gelatin, sorbitol and SDS; and the dispersephase comprises polyethoxylated castor oil, caprylic/caprictriglyceride, 2-(ethoxyethoxy)ethanol and cyclosporin A.
 156. Thepharmaceutical formulation of claim 3, formulated into a unit dosageform for oral administration comprising from 0.1 mg to 1000 mg of theactive ingredient.
 157. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 3,wherein the second coating further comprises at least one excipient.158. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 157, wherein the at leastone excipient is selected from a plasticizer and/or a glidant.